218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
VictoriaCombo
User Guide - 218800
Testing the World’s Networks
TrendCommunications
218800-8.book Page i Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Victoria Combo - Multi-Technology Tester
User Guide
218800-8.book Page ii Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Subject to change without prior notice © Trend Communications 2007
218800-8.book Page i Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Copyright & After Sales Service
Copyright Victoria Combo User Guide. Document No. 218800 issue 8 06/07 June 2007 No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means - electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise - without the prior written permission of Trend Communications. The registered trademarks mentioned in this manual are property of their respective owners. ©Copyright 2007 by Trend Communications Pujades 60, 08005 Barcelona, Spain
After-Sales Service For the after-sales service or for any question about the product delivered, do not hesitate to contact your local supplier. To communicate your suggestions about the tester or the User Guide, contact directly to: Trend Communications, S.L. Pujades, 60 08005 Barcelona, Spain Tel.: + 34 93 300 33 13 Fax: + 34 93 309 23 85 E-mail:
[email protected] http://www.trendcomms.com
Issue 8 - 06/07
i
International Contact Addresses TREND COMMUNICATIONS LTD. Whitebrook Park Lower Cookham Road, Maidenhead, Berkshire, SL6 8XY U.K. TEL: +44 (0) 1628 503500 FAX: +44 (0) 1628 503599 email:
[email protected] TREND COMMUNICATIONS S.A. Burospace - Bat 7 Route de Gisy 91571 BIEVRES CEDEX FRANCE TEL: + 33 1 69 35 54 70 FAX: + 33 1 60 19 00 48 email:
[email protected] TREND COMMUNICATIONS GmbH Valerystr. 1 85716 Unterschleißheim b. GERMANY TEL: + 49 89 32 30 09 (0) FAX: + 49 89 32 30 09-99 email:
[email protected] TREND COMMUNICATIONS C-207 Twin Arcade Military Road Marol Mumbai -400059 INDIA TEL: + 91 22 29203409 or 91 22 29203431 FAX: + 91 22 29206155 TREND COMMUNICATIONS, Inc. 190 Lime Quarry Road, Suite 106, Madison, AL 35758 USA TEL: + 1 256 461 0790 email:
[email protected]
ii
218800
Contents Chapter 1
Introduction Preliminary Checking ......................................................................................... 1-1 Important Note................................................................................................... 1-2 Basic Information ................................................................................................ 1-2 The Application Modules .................................................................................. 1-3 The Front Module ............................................................................................. 1-4 The Rear Module ............................................................................................... 1-6 Adding and Removing Modules ....................................................................... 1-6 Removing the Catches.......................................................................... 1-7 Adding Modules...................................................................................... 1-8 Removing Modules ................................................................................ 1-9 Removing the Optical Sub-Modules .................................................. 1-9 Switching Victoria Combo On and Off ........................................................ 1-10 Switching Victoria Combo On............................................................ 1-10 Sleep Mode.............................................................................................. 1-10 Switching Victoria Combo Off............................................................ 1-11 Batteries ................................................................................................................ 1-11 Using Battery Power ............................................................................. 1-11 Removing the Batteries ........................................................................ 1-11 Fitting the Batteries ............................................................................... 1-12 Battery Charge Indicator ..................................................................... 1-12 Charging the Batteries .......................................................................... 1-13 Shoulder Strap ..................................................................................................... 1-13 Safety Information ............................................................................................. 1-14
Chapter 2
The Graphical User Interface The Desktop ........................................................................................................ 2-3 General Navigation Structure .......................................................................... 2-4 Displaying the Main Menu Options.................................................... 2-4 Opening a Window from the Main Menu........................................ 2-6 Customising the Working Area.......................................................... 2-7 Working with Icons ............................................................................... 2-7 Entering Alphanumeric Information ............................................................... 2-8
Chapter 3
Testing with the 10G Module Introduction ......................................................................................................... 3-1 The 10G Module Home Screen ..................................................................... 3-2 Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver....................................................... 3-3 Setting up the Transmitter ................................................................... 3-3 Setting up the Receiver......................................................................... 3-6 The Transmitter and Receiver Maps................................................. 3-8 Inserting Events ................................................................................................... 3-8 Inserting Alarms ..................................................................................... 3-8 Inserting Errors ...................................................................................... 3-10 Inserting Pointer Sequences ................................................................ 3-11
Issue 8 - 06/07
iii
Contents Making Measurements ......................................................................................3-12 Using the Auto Measurement Timer.................................................3-12 Setting up a Measurement Macro.......................................................3-13 Setting Objectives ..............................................................................................3-14 G.826 Objectives.................................................................................................3-15 G.828 Objectives.................................................................................................3-15 G.829 Settings......................................................................................................3-15 M.2101 Objectives ..............................................................................................3-16 Displaying Instant Results ..................................................................................3-16 LEDs ..........................................................................................................3-16 Measuring Optical Power .....................................................................3-17 Measuring Signal Frequency .................................................................3-18 Displaying Overhead Bytes ..................................................................3-19 Displaying Pointer Values......................................................................3-22 Displaying Path Trace Message Results .............................................3-22 Timed Results ......................................................................................................3-23 Alarm Results..........................................................................................3-24 Error Results ...........................................................................................3-24 Pointer Event Results ............................................................................3-25 FEC Results..............................................................................................3-25 G.826 Results ..........................................................................................3-25 G.828 Results ..........................................................................................3-25 G.829 Results ..........................................................................................3-26 M.2101 Results........................................................................................3-26 M.2110 ......................................................................................................3-26 M.2120 ......................................................................................................3-27 Performing Functions .........................................................................................3-27 Autoconfiguration ..................................................................................3-27 Scanning Tributaries...............................................................................3-28 Automatic Protection Switching.........................................................3-29 Measuring Round Trip Delay ...............................................................3-29 Performing an Overhead BER Test ....................................................3-30
Chapter 4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Introduction..........................................................................................................4-1 The 2.5G Module Home Screen ....................................................................4-2 Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver .......................................................4-3 Setting up the Transmitter ...................................................................4-3 Setting up the Receiver.........................................................................4-7 The Transmitter and Receiver Maps .................................................4-9 Inserting Events ...................................................................................................4-9 Inserting Errors.......................................................................................4-11 Inserting Pointer Sequences ................................................................4-12 Inserting ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequences .......................................4-13
iv
218800
Contents Measurements...................................................................................................... 4-14 Using the Auto Measurement Timer ................................................ 4-14 Setting up a Measurement Macro Setup........................................... 4-14 Setting Objectives .............................................................................................. 4-15 G.821 Objectives ................................................................................... 4-16 M.2100 Objectives................................................................................. 4-16 Displaying Instant Results ................................................................................ 4-17 LEDs.......................................................................................................... 4-17 Measuring Optical Power..................................................................... 4-18 Measuring Signal Frequency................................................................. 4-18 Displaying Overhead Bytes .................................................................. 4-18 Displaying Path Trace Messages ......................................................... 4-20 Signalling Results .................................................................................... 4-20 Pointer Values......................................................................................... 4-21 Timed Results ..................................................................................................... 4-22 Alarm Results.......................................................................................... 4-23 Error Results........................................................................................... 4-23 Pointer Event Results ............................................................................ 4-23 G.821 Results.......................................................................................... 4-24 M.2100 Results ....................................................................................... 4-24 M.2110...................................................................................................... 4-25 M.2120...................................................................................................... 4-26 Other Results ......................................................................................... 4-26 Performing Functions ......................................................................................... 4-26 Autoconfiguration.................................................................................. 4-27 Scanning Tributaries............................................................................... 4-27 Automatic Protection Switching......................................................... 4-28 Measuring Round Trip Delay ............................................................... 4-28 Performing an Overhead BER Test .................................................... 4-28
Chapter 5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Introduction ......................................................................................................... 5-1 About Next Generation SDH/SONET............................................. 5-1 The NG 2.5G Module........................................................................... 5-2 The NG 2.5G Module Control Panel Screen............................................... 5-2 Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup ................................................. 5-5 Choosing the Physical Settings............................................................ 5-5 Setting up PDH and T-Carrier ............................................................ 5-6 Setting up Virtual Concatenation (VCAT) ....................................... 5-8 Setting up the LCAS .............................................................................. 5-10 Choosing the GFP Settings .................................................................. 5-13 Choosing the Ethernet Settings.......................................................... 5-15 Setting Up Traffic Generation ............................................................. 5-18 Setting Up the Physical Transmitter................................................... 5-20
Issue 8 - 06/07
v
Contents Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup .......................................................5-22 Choosing the Physical Settings............................................................5-22 Setting up PDH and T-Carrier.............................................................5-23 Setting Up the VCAT ............................................................................5-23 Setting Up the LCAS .............................................................................5-25 Setting Up the GFP ................................................................................5-25 Choosing the Rx Ethernet Settings....................................................5-26 Inserting Events ..................................................................................................5-28 Alarm Insertion.......................................................................................5-28 Error Insertion........................................................................................5-29 Inserting Pointer Sequences ................................................................5-30 Inserting ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequences .......................................5-30 Measurements......................................................................................................5-30 Using the Auto Measurement Timer.................................................5-30 Setting up a Macro Measurement.......................................................5-30 Displaying Instant Results ..................................................................................5-30 LEDs ..........................................................................................................5-31 Measuring Optical Power.....................................................................5-34 Measuring Signal Frequency .................................................................5-34 Pointer Values .........................................................................................5-34 Ethernet Flow Filtered ..........................................................................5-35 Rx Bandwidth..........................................................................................5-37 Timed Results .....................................................................................................5-38 Physical Error Results ...........................................................................5-40 Pointer Event Results ............................................................................5-41 LCAS Event Summary ...........................................................................5-42 GFP Events Results ................................................................................5-43 VCAT Alarms and Delay ......................................................................5-44 Ethernet Error Results..........................................................................5-45 Performance Results..............................................................................5-46 Functions...............................................................................................................5-46 GFP Autodetection................................................................................5-46 RFC 2544 .................................................................................................5-47 Automatic Protection Switching.........................................................5-48 Round Trip Delay ...................................................................................5-48
Chapter 6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Introduction..........................................................................................................6-1 About Jitter and Wander......................................................................6-2 About Jitter and Wander Measurements .........................................6-2 The Jitter/Wander Module...................................................................6-2 The Jitter/Wander Module Home Screen .....................................................6-3 Jitter Generation and Analysis .........................................................................6-4 Output Jitter Measurement .................................................................6-4 Jitter Generation ....................................................................................6-8 Combined Jitter Measurement............................................................6-9 Jitter Modulation Output .....................................................................6-9 Jitter Alarms and LEDs .........................................................................6-10
vi
218800
Contents Wander Generation and Analysis ................................................................... 6-11 Output Wander Measurement........................................................... 6-11 Wander Generation .............................................................................. 6-13 Wander Alarms and LEDs ................................................................... 6-15 Wander Modulation Output ............................................................... 6-15 Jitter/Wander Functions.................................................................................... 6-15 Jitter/Wander Tolerance...................................................................... 6-16 Jitter/Wander Transfer.......................................................................... 6-18 MTIE/TDEV ............................................................................................. 6-20 MTIE and TDEV-Based Wander Tolerance Measurement............ 6-22
Chapter 7
Tracing Events Introduction ......................................................................................................... 7-1 Displaying the Trace Viewer ............................................................................. 7-1 Choosing the Events you want to Trace ....................................................... 7-1 The Trace Viewer Window .............................................................................. 7-2 Arrangement and Functions ............................................................................. 7-3 Real-time histogram ........................................................................................... 7-6 Real-time event log............................................................................................. 7-6
Chapter 8
Generating a Report Creating a Results File ....................................................................................... 8-1 Creating a Report File ...................................................................................... 8-2
Chapter 9
Using Files The File Manager Windows.............................................................................. 9-1 Working with Files.............................................................................................. 9-2 Changing the Properties of a File....................................................... 9-2 Deleting Files........................................................................................... 9-2 Protecting Files ....................................................................................... 9-3 Moving Files to another Location ...................................................... 9-3 Copying Files to another Location..................................................... 9-3 Printing a File........................................................................................... 9-4 Viewing a File .......................................................................................... 9-4 Loading a File .......................................................................................... 9-4 Transferring Files from Victoria Combo to a Computer............. 9-5 Transferring Files from Victoria Combo to a Computer using a Compact Flash Device .......................................................................... 9-6
Chapter 10 Chapter 11
General Timing Controlling Multiple Modules and Displaying LEDs Introduction to Victoria Combo Modules .................................................... 11-1 Global Start & Autostart...................................................................... 11-1 Global Action.......................................................................................... 11-3 Global LEDs ............................................................................................ 11-3 Saving the Configuration of a Module ............................................................ 11-4 Saving the Configuration of the Whole Tester ............................................ 11-4
Issue 8 - 06/07
vii
Contents Chapter 12
Setting up the Victoria Combo Platform Changing the Language ......................................................................................12-1 Displaying Software and Firmware Versions and Changing Software .....12-1 Displaying Software and Firmware Versions ....................................12-1 Changing Software .................................................................................12-2 Setting the Time and Date................................................................................12-3 Device List ...........................................................................................................12-4 Setting up Networking.......................................................................................12-4 Host Configuration................................................................................12-4 Ethernet Ports ........................................................................................12-5 Ethernet CF Card 1 and 2....................................................................12-6 Setting up the Serial Port ..................................................................................12-6 Changing Backlight Settings ..............................................................................12-7 Changing the Audio Settings ............................................................................12-7 Setting up the Configuration lock ...................................................................12-8
Chapter 13
Using Remote Control for Victoria Combo Getting Started ....................................................................................................13-1
Chapter 14
Support
Appendix A1 Technical Specifications Platform .................................................................................................................A1-1 10G Module ........................................................................................................A1-5 2.5G Module .......................................................................................................A1-9 NG 2.5G Module ...............................................................................................A1-14 Jitter/Wander Module ......................................................................................A1-23
Appendix A2 Tributary Numbering ITU-T G.707 Tributary Numbering for AU-4...............................................A2-1 ITU-T G.707 Tributary Numbering for AU-4-4c .......................................A2-3 ITU-T G.707 Tributary Numbering for AU-4-16c ......................................A2-5
Appendix A3 CE Statement of Conformity Appendix A4 SNMP Introduction..........................................................................................................A4-1 SNMP Query to Victoria Combo ...................................................................A4-1 Identification of the Tester................................................................................A4-2 Mapping Tester Data Base Registers to SNMP OIDs ...............................A4-4 Obtaining the MIB...............................................................................................A4-5 Release Note:..........................................................................................A4-6
viii
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
1
Introduction
1.1
Preliminary Checking Welcome to Victoria Combo. When you receive your tester, please make sure that the following items are included in the carrying bag: •
Victoria Combo tester with the corresponding module or modules (10G Module, 2.5G Module, NG 2.5G Module and Jitter/Wander Module are currently available)
•
FC-FC 10 dB Optical Attenuator (for loop-back connections between optical Tx and Rx on the 10G module)
•
15 dB FC-FC Optical attenuator (for loop-back connections between optical Tx and Rx on the 2.5G module and NG 2.5G Module)
•
CD-ROM
•
AC/DC adapter
•
Mains power cable
•
Ethernet data cable
•
Ethernet crossover data cable
•
Pointer (a stylus attached to the rear module)
•
Multi-use shoulder strap In addition to this, one Li-Ion battery pack is installed in Victoria Combo in the factory. Central compartment (Victoria Combo)
Side compartment (Ethernet cables and shoulder strap)
Side compartment (AC/DC adapter and mains cord)
Front compartment (CD-ROM)
Figure
1.1
Issue 8 - 06/07
Soft carrying bag
1-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
1
1.2
Introduction Important Note
Important Note This User Guide is intended for use with several models of Victoria Combo. Some of these models are modular - that is, different application modules that you can fit to and remove from the tester. This gives you a very flexible tester that can easily be added to. Other models of Victoria Combo can test a particular transmission technology, for example 2.5 Gbit/s (STM-16/OC-48), but you cannot add or remove modules without upgrading the tester. To do this you must contact Trend Communications or one of our distributors. The operation of the two types of tester is almost identical apart from the ability to add and remove modules. Some parts of this User Guide will not be applicable if your Victoria Combo is not modular, particularly Adding and Removing Modules on page 1-6. To find out whether your Victoria Combo is modular, look at the code number on the tester. If your tester has a number starting in CMB, it is not modular.
1.3
Basic Information Victoria Combo is a tester that is based on a modular platform; it is capable of performing a wide range of tests on networks. All Victoria Combos are based on one platform, and the range of tests available depends on the modules purchased by your organisation. The tester is designed to be fully portable, so it can be battery-powered or powered from the mains electricity supply. The platform consists of a mainframe or Front Module housing several Application Modules and a Rear Module connected to the rear of the Application Modules.
1-2
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
1
Introduction The Application Modules
Rear module
Front module
Application modules
Figure
1.4
1.2
The modular architecture of Victoria Combo
The Application Modules There are four modules currently available for performing transmission tests over SDH, SONET, PDH and T-Carrier networks. They are used by connecting to the equipment under test. •
2.5G Module: This module enables generation and analysis of traffic from 1.5 up to 2.5 Gbit/s in PDH/TCAR and SDH/SONET. Both electrical and optical interfaces are available.
•
NG 2.5G Module: This module enables testing of Next Generation
SDH/SONET networks. Optical and electrical interfaces from 1.5 Mbit/s up to 2.5 Gbit/s are available.
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
10G Module: This module enables you to perform tests and measurements with SDH and SONET signal structures at 10 Gbit/s.
•
Jitter/Wander Module: With this module you can test SDH/SONET and PDH networks at bit rates up to STM-16.
1-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
1
Introduction The Front Module
1.5
The Front Module The Mainframe contains devices that can be used by different Application Modules, for example the display and a battery pack (the Mainframe is also available without the display). Several devices, for example a keyboard and mouse can also be connected to the mainframe: 4
1
5
6
2 8
7
Figure
1.3
3
Front module description
1. Power ON/OFF switch: switches the tester ON, to stand-by (sleep) or OFF 2. Microphone 3. Speaker 4. 4 LEDs system indicators: •
ON: Indicates ON state (Green: ON, Blinking Green: Sleep Mode)
•
DC: Indicates DC power supply from the adapter/charger connected
to the mains •
Batt: Indicates power supply from batteries (Red: battery low)
•
LAN: Indicates LAN activity (Blinking Green: Connected to LAN)
5. Photodetector for automatic brightness adjustment of the screen. 6. Rubber corner moulding - protection against bumps and scratches 7. Touch screen 8. Battery compartment
1-4
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
1
Introduction The Front Module
The top of the front module has the following connectors: 12
4
7
2
8
9
Figure
3 1.4
11
10
Reset
1
10
5
6
Mainframe top connectors
1. Two CF (Compact Flash) Slots (Type II) 2. One expansion slot for future applications 3. Two LED indicators: •
LK: Detection of LAN connection
•
PW: Power
4. RJ-45(10BaseT Ethernet) connector for LAN connection 5. USB peripheral port for future applications 6. STEREO INput/OUTput for future applications 7. Ref.IN: BNC connector for reference clock input (1544 kHz, 2048 kHz, any clock signal from 64 kHz to 10 MHz multiple of 8 kHz), E1 (0 or 20 dB), T1 (0 or -20 dB) 8. Ref.OUT: BNC connector for reference clock output (1544 kHz or 2048 kHz) 9. DB9 connector for RS-232C interface 10.Audio IN/OUT for future applications 11.Two USB host connectors for keyboard and mouse 12.Reset the equipment via hardware NOTE: The CF slots accept: Memory Microdrive Cards, Ethernet, and Wireless LAN cards
Issue 8 - 06/07
1-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
1
Introduction The Rear Module
1.6
The Rear Module The Rear Module houses the DC input connector (18 Vdc) for the whole tester and a compartment for an additional battery pack. This hotpluggable, redundant battery pack extends the time the tester will operate without a mains electricity supply, and enables you to change one battery pack while the other supplies the power1. A folding leg on the rear case enables you to adjust the tester’s position for desktop use. In addition to this, a ring with an anti-theft lock is fitted to the top left-hand corner of the module.
1.7
Adding and Removing Modules The ergonomic design of the Victoria Combo enables you to easily add or remove modules from your tester without any additional tools. This way, you can create the tester you need. Victoria Combo enables you to install up to four modules. The limit is that the power consumption of the whole tester must not exceed 130W. If your Victoria Combo is not modular, you cannot add or remove the modules (see Important Note on page 1-2). Catches
Front module
Rear module
Catches
Folding leg
Figure
1.5
General description of mechanical parts
1. Victoria Combo includes the main battery pack in the mainframe
1-6
218800
218800-8.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Introduction Adding and Removing Modules
1.7.1
1
Removing the Catches The Victoria Combo modules are held together by catches between the mainframe and modules and between the different modules. Before you can add or remove any modules you must remove the catches that hold the tester together. 1. Before you start, switch off Victoria Combo. 2. Place Victoria Combo face down on a flat, firm surface with the connectors away from you.
Figure
1.6
Step 2
3. Remove the anti-theft lock if it is fitted.
Figure
1.7
Step 3
4. Push down the catch and twist it towards you so that it disengages from the lugs. The catches may be quite difficult to remove. This ensures that there are good connections between the modules. 5. Repeat this for all the four catches.
Issue 8 - 06/07
1-7
218800-8.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
1
Introduction Adding and Removing Modules
Figure
1.7.2
1.8
Step 4
Adding Modules 1. Remove the catches (see Removing the Catches on page 1-7). 2. Add the module you want to add, making sure that the connectors between the modules are connected properly. 3. As you re-fit the modules, also re-fit the catches. 4. Push the modules firmly together to make sure that there is a good connection between the modules.
1-8
218800
218800-8.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Introduction Adding and Removing Modules
1.7.3
1
Removing Modules 1. Remove the catches (see Removing the Catches on page 1-7). 2. Lift the module you want to remove off the tester. 3. If necessary,re-fit the modules you want to retain. 4. Re-fit the catches as you re-fit the modules. 5. Push the modules firmly together to make sure that there is a good connection between the modules.
1.7.4
Removing the Optical Sub-Modules The optical sub-modules in the 10G modules (STM-64/OC-192) can be removed to be replaced by other ones, or for cleaning (their optical connectors are removable). 1. Switch off Victoria Combo. 2. Push down the levers (towards Release) for the optical transmitter and receiver modules you want to remove. 3. Pull the optical module out of the tester using the lever. Levers to remove the optical sub-modules
Figure
1.9
Issue 8 - 06/07
Removable optical sub-module of the STM-64/OC-192 module
1-9
218800-8.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
1
Introduction Switching Victoria Combo On and Off
1.8
Switching Victoria Combo On and Off Victoria Combo has three possible power states: •
Switched on
•
Sleep mode (low power consumption mode)
•
Switched off You cannot put Victoria Combo into sleep mode or switch it off when a measurement is being performed. If you try to do this, a buzzer will sound to remind you that measurements are active. The following sections explain how to change Victoria Combo from one state to another.
1.8.1
Switching Victoria Combo On 1. Press the ON/OFF button for 4 seconds. The internal memory and I/O devices test runs automatically. During this process a flashing cursor is displayed at the top left-hand corner of the screen. When the flashing cursor disappears, booting is complete; this takes approximately 30 to 40 seconds. For a short time the screen remains blank until Press Screen to Start Calibration is displayed. 2. If this is the first time you are using this Victoria Combo, follow the instructions for calibrating the touch screen. If the tester has been used before, you can ignore the message.
1.8.2
Sleep Mode This mode has two advantages: •
Battery life is extended. In this mode, the screen and other power consuming internal devices are switched off.
•
All the settings of the current configuration are stored in the internal memory. When you press the ON/OFF button again, the tester returns to the switched-on state quickly, avoiding the re-booting process. To put Victoria Combo into sleep mode: Press the ON/OFF button briefly (for approximately 1 second). The ON LED flashes on and off. To wake Victoria Combo from sleep mode: Press the ON/OFF button briefly again. Victoria Combo wakes up and the ON LED flashes is green.
1-10
218800
218800-8.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Introduction Batteries
1.8.3
1
Switching Victoria Combo Off Press the ON/OFF button for 4 seconds. Victoria Combo switches off.
1.9
Batteries
1.9.1
Using Battery Power Victoria Combo is supplied with one battery pack (it can be extended to two packs). The batteries are removable, rechargeable, Lithium-Ion (LiIon). There are two battery compartments:
1.9.2
•
in the right-hand side of the front module;
•
in the centre of the rear module (additional pack).
Removing the Batteries 1. Open the battery compartment cover in the right-hand side of the front module using the locking tab.
2. Remove the connector that connects the battery to Victoria Combo. Press the tab on the side of the connector inwards to release the catch. 3. Pull the battery pack out of the compartment.
Issue 8 - 06/07
1-11
218800-8.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
1
Introduction Batteries
4. If you want to remove the battery pack from the additional battery compartment, press the cover gently towards the tester and slide the cover towards the top of the tester.
5. Remove the connector that connects the battery to the Victoria Combo. Press the tab on the side of the connector inwards to release the catch. 6. Pull the battery pack out of the compartment.
1.9.3
Fitting the Batteries 1. Place the battery in the battery compartment. 2. Replace the connector that connects the battery to Victoria Combo. The connector has a tab, press the tab to connect the battery cable to the socket in the housing, make sure that the connectors are fully pressed together. 3. Refit the battery compartment cover; make sure that it is locked in place.
1.9.4
Battery Charge Indicator The BATT LED at the top of the front module gives indicates the state of the batteries: •
When the batteries are fully charged, the LED is green.
•
When the battery level is low, the LED is red. You should connect Victoria Combo to an external power supply as soon as possible.
•
When the battery is charging, the LED blinks green. There is an additional indication related to battery charge level - the green area of the icon
1-12
.
218800
218800-8.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Introduction Shoulder Strap
1.9.5
1
Charging the Batteries The batteries in Victoria Combo can be fast charged (charging time between 2 and 3 hours) when: •
Victoria Combo is switched-off
•
Victoria Combo is in Sleep mode When Victoria Combo is switched on, the batteries are slow-charge (between 8 and 10 hours), provided that the tester is equipped with one or two modules. To recharge the batteries, plug the power adaptor/charger into the socket labelled External DC 18V in Victoria Combo’s rear module.
1.10
Shoulder Strap The shoulder strap supplied with the Victoria Combo bag can be transferred to the rings on the tester. This makes it easier for you to carry the tester. You can adjust he length of the strap.
Figure
1.10
Issue 8 - 06/07
Shoulder strap used for transporting the tester
1-13
218800-8.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
1
Introduction Safety Information
1.11
Safety Information When using Victoria Combo, always take basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons. These include the following: •
Victoria Combo does not require any user maintenance. Do not open the back of the tester or attempt to dismantle it. Call your Trend Communications distributor.
•
Only use the batteries supplied by Trend Communications.
•
Victoria Combo has been tested and approved using the adaptor/ charger with which it is supplied. Using any alternative adaptor/charger will invalidate the approvals relating to safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
•
Do not attempt to recharge any battery in Victoria Combo other than the rechargeable Li Ion battery pack that is supplied. A nonrechargeable battery may explode.
•
Do not dispose of batteries in a fire, as they may explode.
•
Check with local authorities for possible special disposal instructions.
•
Do not short circuit the battery contacts. Warning: CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Each of the optical interfaces in the application modules of Victoria Combo contains a Class 1 laser, which can be active even when Victoria Combo is not connected to the network. Do not look into the interface at any time.
1-14
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2
The Graphical User Interface
When Victoria Combo has booted, the Home screen is displayed as shown in figure 2.1. The home screen enables you to choose the interface module you want to use for your tests, set up timed measurements, save and load configurations, view test results and set up the global LEDs. All the functions on this screen can also be accessed by touching the main menu button ( )or the desktop. Modules fitted
Current LED status Include in Global LED
Include in Global Start Test
History LED status Include in Global Insertion
For information on Global Start Test, Global Insertion, Global LED see page 10-1 Display Module Home screen
Results & Reports
Save & Load configurations
ON/OFF power switch for any module. It preserves battery charge
Figure
2.1
Issue 8 - 06/07
LED settings
Automatic start and duration
Victoria Combo Home screen
2-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2
The Graphical User Interface
For further information, see: •
The 10G Module Home Screen on page 3-2
•
The 2.5G Module Home Screen on page 4-2
•
The NG 2.5G Module Control Panel Screen on page 5-2
•
The Jitter/Wander Module Home Screen on page 6-3
•
Creating a Report File on page 8-2
•
Controlling Multiple Modules and Displaying LEDs on page 11-1 To close the Home screen and display the desktop:
1. Touch
. This is common to all windows.
2. If you want to reopen the Home screen, touch the main menu button , and then choose Home. OR .
Touch
Victoria Combo’s Graphical User Interface (GUI) is based on a multilevel navigation tree.
Work area
Icons
Connection to the mains electricity supply LAN Operation
Action
Print Screen
Main menu
Window organizer Open/Close all windows Keyboard
Figure
2-2
2.2
Home sScreen
Elapsed time
Start/ Stop
OR LED
LTI LED
Battery level
The Victoria Combo desktop
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2
The Graphical User Interface The Desktop
2.1
The Desktop The Victoria Combo desktop has two different areas: the work area and the taskbar located at the bottom of the desktop. The Work area is the area where the different screens (Settings, Results etc.) are displayed. Icons can be added here from the general navigation tree to simplify the access to some available options. The bar located at the bottom of the desktop includes the following options: •
The Main menu button, . When you touch this button the main menu with the main options is displayed. The area next to the Main menu button contains Action buttons. These buttons enable you to perform several actions, such as:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
Start/Stop button
•
Action button : enables you to insert events, for example errors, alarms and pointer events.
•
Keyboard : when you touch this, an alphanumeric keyboard is displayed. This enables you to enter alphanumeric information. (See Entering Alphanumeric Information on page 2-8)
•
Print Screen : this button enables you to create a .jpg image of the current screen. This file is automatically saved on Victoria Combo, and it can be transferred to a PC using a LAN or wireless connection.
•
The Organize the windows button enables you to organise the open windows on the desktop. For example: delete all the icons, minimise all the icons, close all the windows.
•
Home
•
Remove All: delete all the icons on the desktop
•
Iconize All: creates icons from all the currently opened windows on the desktop.
•
Close All: closes all the windows that are open on the desktop (without creating icons)
•
The Open/Close All button closes all the windows that are currently open on the desktop. By touching this button again, all the previously closed windows are opened (only those ones that were closed by touching this button).
•
The OR LED indicates if there is an impairment (alarm or error) being detected by the tester. It is generated from an OR function of the total of alarms and errors in the module specified, see Global LEDs on page 11-3.
: to start and stop measurements.
displays the Victoria Combo Home screen.
2-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2
The Graphical User Interface General Navigation Structure
•
The LTI LED (Loss of Timing Input LED) timing source has been lost.
indicates that the external
The area next to the action buttons is the Icon Bar area, and it displays general information, such as:
2.2
•
Battery Icon
•
Network Icon : indicates when the tester is connected to a network (LAN, Internet) via IP. The screens of the PCs in the icon flash when the tester is connected to a network and interchanging IP packets.
•
Plug-in Icon : gives information about the connection of the tester to an external power supply. This icon disappears when Victoria Combo is working with batteries.
: an indication of the battery charge level.
General Navigation Structure The navigation through the graphical user interface of Victoria Combo is based on a main menu with options being displayed as you navigate through the menu tress.
2.2.1
Displaying the Main Menu Options Touch the button to display all the options in the general navigation tree. The options in the main menu are the following: •
2-4
Options associated with the application module(s) installed: They are identified by a representative label of the module, for example stm641 for the module STM-64/OC-192. See figure 2.3.
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
The Graphical User Interface General Navigation Structure
•
Figure
2.3
2
Common options - common to all the application modules: Measurements Reporting, Files, General Timing, Modules, Platform and Support information
Main menu in Victoria Combo
Each menu displays a submenu associated with the main menu options. All the options are described in detail in the following chapters.
Issue 8 - 06/07
2-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2
The Graphical User Interface General Navigation Structure
2.2.2
Opening a Window from the Main Menu 1. Touch the Main menu button, The main menu is displayed.
.
2. Choose the menu item you want to open the window for. You may have to navigate through several menus to reach the item you want. 3. Choose Open. The window you have chosen opens on the desktop. Victoria Combo can display several windows at the same time. You can change the position of some windows so that the information can be displayed in the way that best suits you. Each window has a title bar at the top where you can reduce the window to an icon and/or close the window.
Figure
2.4
Opening the Transmitter Setup window
The title bar of the windows includes the following buttons: • •
2-6
closes the window reduces the window to an icon, see Adding icons to the desktop on page 2-7.
218800
218800-8.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2
The Graphical User Interface General Navigation Structure
2.2.3
Customising the Working Area You can customise the working area by adding icons for windows and arranging the icons as you want to. Adding icons to the desktop 1. Open the window you want to create an icon for. (See Opening a Window from the Main Menu on page 2-6) 2. Choose
from the top right-hand corner of the window.
Moving icons 1. Touch the icon you want to move. 2. While still keeping the pointer in contact with the touch-screen, drag the icon to where you want it.
2.2.4
Working with Icons The icons on the desktop enable you to Open and Close windows without having to navigate through the main menu. You can also Remove the icon from the desktop. These options are available in the form of a pop-up menu, just by pressing the right mouse button. Opening a window from an icon Using a pointer: Tap on the icon twice, quickly. OR Touch the icon for a few seconds, then remove the pointer. Choose Open from the menu that is displayed. Using a mouse: Double-click on the icon OR Right mouse click on the icon Choose Open from the menu that is displayed. Deleting icons 1. Touch the icon you want to delete and hold the pointer in contact for a few seconds, then remove the pointer. A pop-up menu is displayed. 2. Choose Remove from the menu. The icon is deleted.
Issue 8 - 06/07
2-7
218800-8.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2
The Graphical User Interface Entering Alphanumeric Information
NOTE: When the pointer is used for navigation, the equivalent to rightclicking the mouse is touching the icon for approximately 5 seconds (until the pop-up menu associated with the icon is displayed). Icons in the work area When you have placed icons on Victoria Combo’s desktop, the different types of applications are indicated by different icons. The icon is also displayed in the title bar of the window when the application window is open. The different icons are the following: Setup Insertion Timed Results Measurement Instant Results Functions Platform
2.3
Entering Alphanumeric Information When you are using Victoria Combo, you may need to enter different values or characters. To do this: 1. Touch the field where you want to enter the values or characters. 2. Touch the Keyboard button at the bottom of the work area. The keyboard window is displayed. By using the keyboard window you can enter letters, numbers and other symbols when needed. 3. To enter characters, touch the keyboard buttons. Before you start entering the characters, make sure that the window you want to type in is active (the title bar is blue). The characters are displayed in the field as you touch the keys on the keyboard. 4. To delete the previous character in the field, touch BackSpace. The keyboard can be moved to any corner of the desktop, so that it does not obscure other screens. Touch one of the four arrows at the top righthand corner of the Keyboard window to do this.
2-8
218800
218800-8.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2
The Graphical User Interface Entering Alphanumeric Information
5. To remove the keyboard from the screen, touch the Keyboard button again.
Keyboard
Issue 8 - 06/07
2-9
218800-8.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2
2-10
The Graphical User Interface Entering Alphanumeric Information
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 10G Module
3.1
3
Introduction The STM-64/OC-192 module enables you to perform a wide range of measurements on SDH and SONET networks at bit rates up to 10 Gbit/s. When a module is added to Victoria Combo, a new item is added at the top part of the main menu. When you touch this menu item, several new menu items are displayed:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
Save Configuration
•
Load Default Configuration
•
Real-time event log - tracks events with timestamp
•
Real-time histogram - tracks events with a real-time graphical histogram
•
Configuration: to set up both the transmitter and the receiver for a test (see Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver on page 3-3).
•
Insertion of errors, alarms and pointer events into the bit stream being transmitted. See Inserting Events on page 3-8.
•
Measurements - programming error performance objectives, timer and reports of the measurements. See Making Measurements on page 3-12.
•
Instant Results - the LEDs panels, pointer values, capture of overhead bytes, graphics, FEC results and other information about the measurement. See Displaying Instant Results on page 3-16.
•
Timed Results, such as alarms, errors, pointer events, overhead bytes, performance results. See Timed Results on page 3-23.
•
Functions which enable you to perform the following measurements: Autoconfiguration, Scan, APS, RTD, and Overhead BER test setup. See Performing Functions on page 3-27.
•
Save Configuration - saves the current configuration of the module.
3-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module The 10G Module Home Screen
3.2
The 10G Module Home Screen The module Home screens display information on the status of the 10G Module, the test that is running or the last test run. These screens can be used as control panels for the test module instead of using the menus. To display the module Home screen: 1. Touch the Main menu button, The main menu is displayed.
.
2. Choose the 10G module, and then choose Home. Touch next to the 10G module in the list on the tester Home screen. The module Home screen is displayed. LEDs (for more information see LEDs on page 3-16)
Change LEDs display
LEDs
Transmitter and Receiver Setup Summary
Tx
Rx
Interface:
STM-16
STM-16
Type:
1310 nm
1310 nm
Mapping:
AU-3/ C-12
AU4/ C-12
Setup
Xxxxxx
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
Summary XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
History
Pattern: PRBS23, ITU Tx-Rx Coupled
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Freq. Offset:
Optical Power: -10 dBm
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Measurement and Evaluation
OK Settings & Details
Test status
Figure
3.1
Duration: 100 min.
Rx Tx
SDH
Frequency:
Start/stop test
2,488,320,000 Hz -50
ppm
Errors:
65
Secs.
Alarms:
45
Secs.
AU Ptr:
340
TU Ptr:
550
Overhead Error Detail Alarm Detail Pointers Scan RTD APS
Insertion Event type: B2 Error Mode: Burst 100 Error
Timed Test
Test setup Test progress
Autoconfig.
Results
Xxxxxx
Measuring...
PRBS23, ITU
DUT PDH
XXXX
SDH
XXXX
PDH
XXXX
Generator Analyser
Xxxxxx
Alarm
Test results
Insert event
The 10G Module Home screen
To display more details or to change settings, choose one of the buttons on the screen.
3-2
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 10G Module Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver
3.3
3
Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver The Setup menu enables you to program the settings for both the transmitter and the receiver. In addition, it enables you to display windows that show the present configuration graphically (Transmitter and Receiver Map). See The Transmitter and Receiver Maps on page 3-8.
3.3.1
Setting up the Transmitter 1. From the Setup menu, choose Transmitter Setup, then choose Open. The Transmitter Setup window is displayed. 2. First, select the appropriate Network option (SDH or SONET) for the network you are testing. 3. Choose the operation Mode you want to use. This can be Terminated (Generator/Analyzer) or Transparent (passthrough mode). 4. Set the Reference Clock Source (Mainframe or Recovered) and the frequency deviation (Offset) in ppm. Mainframe means that the clock is provided by an internal or external source. This means that you must program this source using the General Timing window of the main menu. See General Timing on page 10-1. The following information is displayed: •
Optical transmitter Wavelength (1550 nm or 1310 nm, depending on the optical sub-module installed)
•
Tx Line Rate Information: 9,953.280 kbit/s for the STM-64/OC-192 module
5. Set the specific Mapping structure that is applicable for the network that you want to test. 6. Set up the tributary that contains the test pattern (Tributaries under Test) from the list boxes. Note that criteria for numbering tributaries are Time Slot-TS (according to ITU-T G.707). See Tributary Numbering on page A2-1. 7. Choose the Test pattern you want to use. You can select a Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence (PRBS) or word pattern. The pattern can be defined as a PRBS (inverted or non inverted), a binary Fixed Word or a user-programmed word (16-bit word to be programmed in Hexadecimal code). If you want to perform a Bit Error Rate (BER) test on the OH bytes, choose the test pattern from the Test on OH Byte list. 8. If you want to perform Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM), touch TCM N1. Only choose this if the network under test uses this feature. Make sure that the checkbox is not ticked if the network does not support TCM.
Issue 8 - 06/07
3-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver
9. If you want to switch on G.707 in-band Forward Error Correction (FEC), touch FEC On. Only choose this if the network under test uses this function. Make sure that the checkbox is not ticked if the network does not support FEC. NOTE:The FEC option will be available in future software and hardware releases 10.The settings in the Transmitter (Generator) can be copied to the Receiver (Analyser) and vice-versa. To do this, use the three Coupling buttons at the bottom of the window. The button on the left uncouples the setting of both sections (this way the transmitter is fully independent of the receiver). 11.Switch the Optical Transmitter ON, by touching the button at the top right-hand corner of the window. A red LED with an ON status message is displayed. When the optical transmitter is switched off, the status message will change to OFF and the LED turns blue. NOTE:Make sure you put the 10 dB optical attenuator in any direct looped connection between the optical transmitter and the optical receiver to prevent damage to the receiver.
Figure
3-4
3.2
Transmitter Setup
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 10G Module Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver
3
Other options, at lower levels, can be displayed by touching the following buttons in the Transmitter Setup window (you can also display these options through the main menu). •
Background: program the type of payload transmitted in the background tributaries. Choose Word to enter four hexadecimal characters. Select As main if the information contained in the background tributaries is not important. They will be filled with the same information as the tributary under test programmed in the main Setup window.
•
OH Bytes: displays and enables you to program a hexadecimal value for the OH bytes of the tributaries (OH Page Number from 1 to 64) being tested. The appearance of this window changes, depending on the mapping selected. Some of the OH Bytes are displayed as buttons. This means that you can program them using a description. When you enter the descriptor, the hexadecimal value is entered automatically. The OH Number selected is also displayed. The following OH bytes can be programmed using a description: •
Multiplexer Section Overhead (MSOH/LOH). C1: This byte can be used as an AUG identifier (Enable must be selected) or to transmit path trace messages as the J0 byte (Enable must be deselected). NOTE: Make sure that Enable is not selected when using J0 trail trace messages. K1 and K2: Automatic Protection Switching Channel Bytes. Program the APS Topology and select a description from the list. Information about the OH Page Number and the hexadecimal value corresponding to the description is displayed.
•
S1: Synchronisation Status Byte. Select the description from the list. The hexadecimal value is displayed with the OH Page Number. Higher-Order Path Overhead (HP-POH/POH) C2: Signal Label Byte. Displays the mapping being used in the VC-n. G1: Path Status Byte.
•
K3/Z4: APS Signalling (b1-b4). For protection of the VC-4/STS-3c SPE path levels. Pointer Values: Program the value of AU/STS Path, and the value for SS/XX bits with or without NDF (New Data Flag) in H1 byte. An indication is provided to ensure that the programmed value of the pointer is within the range allowed2. The pointer value can be transmitted with or without NDF indication in the first frames generated.
2. Defined in the ITU/Telcordia Recommendations
Issue 8 - 06/07
3-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver
•
3.3.2
Path Messages: Edit messages to be sent in the J0 and J1 trace bytes to check that they are received correctly. You can choose one of the following: 1, 16 or 64-character messages that can be edited in the text field. When the type of message is not defined by ITU-T G.707, Non ITU is displayed. From this window you can switch on Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM)3 and therefore program messages for the HP-APId/TC STS.
Setting up the Receiver The Receiver Setup window is very similar to the Transmitter Setup window. However, the Receiver Setup window includes some options that are not present on the Transmitter Setup screen. For example Measurement - this enables you to choose the type of measurement from ISM (In-Service Measurement) and OOS (Out-of-Service Measurement). In the first case the receiver configuration screen displays the analysing section only since the Test Pattern analysis is disabled. The Mode relates to the type of Measurement. It can be: •
Terminated: Victoria Combo working as generator/analyzer
•
Transparent: Victoria Combo working as analyzer and re-transmitting the received signal The Optical Receiver button enables you to switch the optical receiver on and off. An LED below the button and text displays its status. The Optical Power Limits button enables you to configure the receiver so that when an out-of-range optical signal is detected, the detector is switched off. The optical power range can be set in accordance with the ITU Recommendations, or you can set it to any other values. Depending on the receiver model, the optical power range is established automatically. The rest of the items in this window are similar to the ones in the Transmitter Setup window.
•
You can select the receiver Wavelength - between 1310 and 1550 nm. Although the receiver has enough bandwidth to cover both wavelengths, in order to measure the optical power accurately, we recommend that you should select the one being received.
•
Select TCM N1 to enable TCM tests if the network under test supports this feature. Make sure that this is not ticked if the network does not support TCM.
3. You can also program TCM from the Setup window.
3-6
218800
218800-8.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 10G Module Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver
3
Select FEC On to enable G.707 in-band FEC if the network under test supports this function. Make sure that this is not selected if the network does not support FEC.
Figure
3.3
Issue 8 - 06/07
Receiver Setup
•
The Pointer Values button enables you to display the Rx Path Trace Message. Here you can set up the messages that are expected, so that Victoria Combo can compare the messages received from the network to the messages you have entered. Choose Enable RS-TIM, Enable HP-TIM or Enable TIM to switch on and set up this comparison.
•
You can copy the settings in the receiver to the transmitter by using the buttons at the bottom of the window, as explained in Setting up the Transmitter on page 3-3.
3-7
218800-8.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Inserting Events
3.3.3
The Transmitter and Receiver Maps The transmitter and receiver map windows display the multiplexing map for SDH/SONET so that you can see the mapping route you have chosen graphically. You can also see the number of the specific tributary under test.
Figure
3.4
3.4
STM-64 Transmitter Map (10G Module)
Inserting Events The Insertion menu items enable you to insert events into the transmitted signal and analyse the effects on the devices under test. You can insert:
3.4.1
•
alarms (see Inserting Alarms in the following)
•
errors (Inserting Errors on page 3-10
•
pointer sequences (see Inserting Pointer Sequences on page 3-11)
Inserting Alarms To set up alarm insertion: From the Insertion menu, choose Alarm Insertion, then choose Open. The Alarm Insertion window is displayed.
3-8
218800
218800-8.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 10G Module Inserting Events
Figure
3.5
3
Alarm Insertion
To set up the way alarms are inserted: 1. Choose the way you want to insert alarms: •
Off: alarm insertion is disabled
•
Continuous: the alarm condition is inserted permanently
•
M single: a burst of m frames with the alarm condition is inserted
•
M/N Repetitive: A total of n frames are transmitted in a repeated pattern. m frames with the alarm condition are transmitted followed by n-m frames without the alarm condition. The value of m must be more than 1, equal to or less than 31 and less than or equal to the value of n. The value of n must be between 1 and 232, and it has to be an even number.
2. Select the Type of Alarm you want to insert from Line, SDH/SONET, TCM or Pattern. 3. If you want to be able to insert the alarm you have programmed using a button on the desktop, choose Controlled by Desktop. If Victoria Combo has more than one module fitted, you can insert events on more than one interface simultaneously. See Global Action on page 11-3.
Issue 8 - 06/07
3-9
218800-8.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Inserting Events
3.4.2
Inserting Errors To set up error insertion: 1. From the Insertion menu, choose Error Insertion, then choose Open. The Error Insertion window is displayed. 2. Choose the way you want to insert errors: •
Off: error insertion is disabled
•
Single: a single error is inserted
•
Rate: errors are inserted at a fixed rate - Mx10-n (where M=1.1, 1.0, 0.9; and n=3...9)
•
Burst: a burst of errors is inserted (enter the number of errors)
•
Repetitive Burst: A burst of errors per second (enter the number of errors) is inserted continuously.
3. Select the Type of error you want to insert from Line, SDH/SONET, TCM, Pattern or PDH/T-Carrier. 4. If you want to be able to insert the error you have programmed using a button on the desktop, choose Controlled by Desktop. If Victoria Combo has more than one module fitted, you can insert events on more than one interface simultaneously. See Global Action on page 11-3.
Figure
3-10
3.6
Error insertion
218800
218800-8.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 10G Module Inserting Events
3.4.3
3
Inserting Pointer Sequences To set up pointer sequence insertion: 1. From the Insertion menu, choose Pointer Sequence Insertion, then choose Open. The Pointer Sequence Insertion window is displayed. 2. Choose the way you want to insert errors: •
Off: pointer sequence insertion is disabled
•
Single: a single pointer event is inserted
•
Pointer Justification Interval: set the duration of the justification interval in hours (h), minutes (m), seconds (s) and milliseconds (ms)
•
Burst: a burst of pointer events is inserted (enter the number of errors)
•
Repetitive Burst: A burst of pointer events per second (enter the number of pointer events) is inserted continuously.
3. Select the type of Pointer Sequence adjustment to be performed. There are different types of pointer events: INC, DEC, INV (Increment, Decrement or Inversion, to stress the pointer processing circuits in the network). 4. If you want to program specific pointer sequences in accordance with the recommendation G.783, touch ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequence. •
Select the Sequence you want to insert.
•
Set up the Initialization, Cool-down, T1 and T-Cancel periods, depending on the selected sequence. In addition, you can program other values by entering the values and the units (seconds, milliseconds, etc.). You can also insert a payload justification for the PDH and T-Carrier tributaries if you want to.
5. If you want to be able to insert the pointer event you have programmed using a button on the desktop, choose Controlled by Desktop. If Victoria Combo has more than one module fitted, you can insert events on more than one interface simultaneously. See Global Action on page 11-3.
Issue 8 - 06/07
3-11
218800-8.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Making Measurements
3.5
Making Measurements The Measurements menu enables you to set up the following:
3.5.1
•
Auto Measurement Timer
•
Macro Measurement Setup
•
G.826 Objectives
•
G.828 Objectives
•
G.829 Programming
•
M.2101 Objectives
Using the Auto Measurement Timer The Auto Measurement Timer enables you to program the timer settings that will affect a particular application running within the module you have chosen. You can set up the following: •
measurement duration
•
a period within the measurement when counters will be reset to zero
•
a start date and time for a measurement
1. From the Measurements menu, choose Auto Measurement Timer, then choose Open. The Auto Measurement Timer window is displayed. 2. To set up a measurement duration, choose Enable, and then enter either a Pre-Defined duration or choose User defined and enter a User Defined duration. NOTE:Test Periods will be available in future software versions of Victoria Combo. 3. To set up a start time and date, choose Enable Auto-Start and enter the date and time when you want the measurement to start. 4. If you want to be able to start the test you have programmed using a button on the desktop, choose Controlled by desktop. If Victoria Combo has more than one module fitted, you can start a test on more than one interface simultaneously. See Global Start & Autostart on page 11-1.
3-12
218800
218800-8.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Making Measurements
3.5.2
Setting up a Measurement Macro The measurement macro provides an easy way to perform several tests automatically. To set up the macro: 1. From the Measurements menu, choose Measurement Macro Setup, then choose Open. The Measurement Macro Setup window is displayed. 2. Choose the tests you want to include in the macro, from the Macro Composition & Evaluation list. 3. When the measurement has finished, the status of the individual tests is indicated by the LEDs next to the tests you have chosen. If any of the tests included in the macro fail, the Global Evaluation icon is red. If all the tests were passed, the Global Evaluation icon is green.
Figure
3.7
Issue 8 - 06/07
Macro window
3-13
218800-8.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Setting Objectives
3.6
Setting Objectives All the objectives on Victoria Combo are set up in a similar way, as described below. For information on settings or results for specific objectives, see the pages in the table below. To set up objectives: 1. From the Measurements menu, choose the menu item for the objective you want to set, then choose Open. The appropriate objective window is displayed. 2. To set the test duration, touch Test Period Setup and set up the duration. This this is the time for which Victoria Combo evaluates the value of the parameters and checks if the objectives are being achieved. 3. First of all, choose Enable at the bottom of the window. This will allow you to program the objective. 4. Select the objective Type you want to program. 5. Enter the Allocation (as a percentage of the global objective assigned to the Hypothetical Reference Path: 27,500 Km). This is not applicable to G.829 objectives. 6. Set up the other parameters for the objective, if applicable. 7. If you want to set up the objectives in detail, touch the button Objectives. The Threshold column enables you to program event thresholds in absolute units (seconds or blocs), if desired. This is not applicable to G.829 objectives. 8. Choose one of the UAS Assignment options (this is not applicable to G.829 objectives): •
Split: evaluation of UAS (Unavailable Seconds) in both directions of the bidirectional path;
•
Path: analysis of UAS just in one direction.
9. Touch Results to display a window containing results. For information on the specific objectives and results, see the pages in the table below:
3-14
Setting up Objectives
Results
G.826
page 3-15
page 3-25
G.828
page 3-15
page 3-25
G.829
page 3-15
page 3-26
M.2101
page 3-16
page 3-26
218800
218800-8.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 10G Module G.826 Objectives
3.7
3
G.826 Objectives The ITU-T G.826 provides monitoring criteria and performance objectives for international digital paths working at a constant bit rate equal to or higher than 2 Mbit/s or 1.5 Mbit/s. Select the G.826 Type you want to program:
3.8
Type
Monitored Signal
RS
STM
MS
STM except RSOH
HO
VC-4, VC-4-4c
G.828 Objectives The types of G.828 measurements available are listed below:
3.9
Type
Monitored Signal
HO-OSM (Out-of-service)
VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c, VC-4-64C
HO-ISM In-service
VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c, VC-4-64C
HO-TCM
TC-4, TC-4-4c, TC-4-16c, TC-4-64C
G.829 Settings The Recommendation ITU-T G.829 does not specify performance objectives. This is why you can only set the type of G.829 measurement and the test period. The types of G.829 measurements available are listed below:
Issue 8 - 06/07
Type
Monitored Signal
RS
STM
MS
STM excepting RSOH
3-15
218800-8.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module M.2101 Objectives
3.10
M.2101 Objectives The M.2101 objectives measurement covers error performance for bringing into service and maintenance of SDH Paths and Multiplex Sections. The type of M.2101 measurements available are listed below: Type
Monitored Signal
MS
STM excepting RSOH
HO
VC-4, VC-4-4c
Select BIS (Bringing-into-Service) to set objective BIS default thresholds for M.2101 measurement. Otherwise, the default thresholds will correspond to a maintenance M.2101 measurement.
3.11
Displaying Instant Results Instant results are results of tests that are not timed. They are test results are displayed on the screen automatically, they are updated continuously, they do not involve starting or stopping a measurement.
3.11.1
LEDs Events that are being detected can first be displayed using the different LED screens and then the number of events displayed on the corresponding Result screens. For more information see Timed Results on page 3-23. The LEDs may be four colours as follows: •
Green: no anomaly or defect
•
Red: defect (Alarm)
•
Yellow: anomaly (Error)
•
White: The event is not relevant to the present configuration. Hierarchical inhibition4 may also mean that a LED is White. Victoria Combo has three types of LED windows: Current, History and Summary:
•
Summary mode enables you to see if any event has occurred in Current LEDS window and/or History LEDS window, but without specifying which one it is (to see this information, you must display the Current LEDS or History LEDS window). The Reset History button in this window enables you to reset the LEDs in this window and the History LEDS window.
4. The event is inhibited by another from a higher level.
3-16
218800
218800-8.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Displaying Instant Results
•
History LEDS window: if an event is detected, the colour of the LED will remain the same until you touch the Reset History button or the tester is switched off.
•
Current LEDS window: the colour of the LED changes (from yellow to green and vice versa) as the event is detected or not detected. In the LED windows the LEDs are grouped in rows according to the type of event that they give information about (Pattern, System, TCM, etc.).
Figure
3.8
3.11.2
Current LEDs
Measuring Optical Power To perform a reliable measurement of optical power, it may be necessary to calibrate the receiver. The objective of the calibration is to set the measured level of the optical power to zero when no signal is received: Calibrating the receiver 1. Make sure that optical receiver is switched on: •
Display the Receiver Setup window.
•
Make sure that the Optical receiver LED is red. If it is not, touch the Optical Receiver button to switch it on.
2. Disconnect any fibre optic connections to the receiver. 3. From the Instant Results menu, choose Optical Power Results, then choose Open. The Optical Power Results window is displayed. 4. Touch the Calibrate button. The label on the button changes to Calibrating and becomes gray. When calibration has finished, the label changes back to Calibrate.
Issue 8 - 06/07
3-17
218800-8.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Displaying Instant Results
Measuring optical power 1. Connect the tester to the network under test. 2. Observe the optical power level displayed in the window, and act according to the message displayed on the Evaluation field:
3.11.3
•
HIGH: The level of the signal being received is out-of-range (higher than 0 dBm) and the reliability of the optical power measurement is guaranteed. In most cases the calibration process will not correct this, and we recommend that you should attenuate the signal.
•
OK: The level of the signal being received is high enough (0 to 22 dBm) to guarantee the reliability of the optical power measurement. No calibration is required.
•
UNCALIBRATED: The level of the signal being received is between -22 and -40 dBm and the receiver requires calibration to guarantee the reliability of the optical power measurement.
•
CALIBRATED: The level of the signal being received is between -22 and -40 dBm and the receiver is calibrated to guarantee the reliability of the measurement. This is the status message that is displayed at the end of the calibration process in the majority of cases. In some cases, if the calibration detects that the signal is low, the status message at the end of the calibration may be OK.
•
LOW: The level of the signal being received is out-of-range (under -40 dBm). The reliability of the optical power measurement is not guaranteed.
Measuring Signal Frequency When this option is selected, Victoria Combo measures line signal frequency to check its deviation from the nominal value. To display the Frequency Results window: 1. Display the Instant Results menu. 2. Choose Frequency Results, then choose Open. The Frequency Results window is displayed. The screen displays the measured frequency in bit/s and the offset with respect to its nominal value. It also displays an Evaluation: OK (In-Range) or BAD (Out-of-Range).
3-18
218800
218800-8.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 10G Module Displaying Instant Results
3.11.4
3
Displaying Overhead Bytes Victoria Combo displays the overhead bytes of the STM-64 signal on different OH pages. You can display the different pages using the arrows next to the OH Page Number. To display the Overhead Byte Results window: 1. Display the Instant Results menu. 2. Choose Overhead Byte Results, then choose Open. The Overhead Byte Results window is displayed. Each OH page corresponds to the overhead included in each one of the 64 tributaries that make up an STM-64 frame5. The value of the OH page number goes from 1 to 64. This is to avoid confusion in the interpretation of the results. The columns displayed on the page depend on the mapping configuration. The bytes transporting messages are highlighted by labelled buttons. To display the messages, touch the button you want to display the message for. There are two windows: one displaying messages carried by the SOH/LOH bytes C1, K1, K2 and S1 and other displaying messages carried by the POH bytes C2, G1, H4 and K3. Setting up Frame Capture Victoria Combo enables you to program the capture of a number of frames to allow monitoring of all the overhead bytes, or some overhead bytes that you are interested in. To display the Capture Setup window: 1. Display the Instant Results menu. 2. Choose Overhead Byte Results, then choose Capture Setup, then choose Open. The Capture Setup window is displayed.
Figure
3.9
Setting up capture in Victoria Combo
5. Or the 64 OC-3 tributaries in an OC-192 SONET signal
Issue 8 - 06/07
3-19
218800-8.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Displaying Instant Results
3. Choose the Type of Capture you want to perform: •
Continuous: Displays all the frame overheads that the tester is receiving. If you choose Continuous capture, all the OH bytes will be displayed but not stored for review. No additional programming is possible in the Capture Setup window.
•
Manual: Captures the frames received starting from when you touch the Activate button in the Overhead Byte Results window. The frames can then be displayed after capture.
•
Trigger: The tester begins to capture frames when a trigger condition occurs. This condition can be an alarm, or when the value of a preprogrammable byte equals a specific value. The frames can then be displayed after capture.
If you have selected Manual or Trigger captures, you can select the bytes to capture: 1. Touch Selection. Individual bytes are displayed in a table where the overhead bytes are arranged by rows and columns in the same way as the general OH bytes window. 2. To select the specific tributaries from which you want to capture the OH bytes, select OH Page No. Victoria Combo will capture a number of frames depending on the number of bytes selected.
Figure
3-20
3.10
Selection of Overhead bytes to capture
218800
218800-8.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Displaying Instant Results
3. To choose the bytes you want to capture, touch the buttons for the bytes. Note that the selected bytes differ from the non-selected ones (the buttons are shaded). You can also automatically select a group of significant bytes within the total overhead by touching the buttons RSOH Bytes, MSOH Bytes, POHBytes or Pointer Bytes. 4. If you want to perform a capture that is started by a trigger, select Trigger and define the Trigger Mode: •
Pre-Trigger: capture n frames before the trigger occurs
•
Post-Trigger: capture n frames after the trigger occurs.
•
Mid-Trigger: capture n/2 frames before and n/2 frames after the trigger occurs.
The trigger can be defined as the occurrence of an Alarm (MS-AIS, MS-RDI or AU-AIS) or the value of a Byte. 5. To enter the Byte value, touch Set Byte. The Capture Trigger screen is displayed.
Figure
3.11
Capture Trigger screen
6. Define the Condition for the comparison (equal value, different value). 7. Enter the information about the trigger byte location using the OH map and the OH Page Number.
Issue 8 - 06/07
3-21
218800-8.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Displaying Instant Results
8. Enter the Trigger Byte Value in hexadecimal or binary format, or set some specific bits of the total byte by entering a binary Mask6. The trigger will be activated when a byte or a group of bits within the total byte captured is equal or different from the programmed byte (depending on what Condition you have set). The results of the Capture are displayed in the Overhead Byte Result window. 9. If you want to start a manual capture, touch Activate in the Overhead Byte Results window. When the capture has finished, the status message DONE is displayed.
3.11.5
Displaying Pointer Values The Pointer Value window enables you to display the AU pointer value programmed and to transmit AU pointers with specific values. 1. From the Instant Results menu choose Pointer Value, then choose Open. The Pointer Value window is displayed. Received Pointers displays the programmed AU pointer value, and the SS/XX unspecified bits that indicate the type of AU/STS-n.There is also an In-Range/Out-of-Range indication and a LED displaying Loss of Pointer (LOP) alarm status. 2. To set the pointer value in the transmitted frame, enter the values in the Transmitted Pointer fields.
3.11.6
Displaying Path Trace Message Results The Path Trace Message Results window displays the J0 and J1 messages received. Victoria Combo checks that no CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) loss is detected when using 16 byte messages. 1. Display the Instant Results menu. 2. Choose Path Trace Message Results, then choose Open. The Path Trace Message Results window is displayed. 3. Select the Message Type you want to insert (1, 16 or 64 characters). When the type of message is not in accordance with ITU recommendations, Non ITU is displayed. If the received message is degraded, the CRC Loss LED turns red. The access point indicators for TCM sections (HPAPId) are also shown when the N1/N2 Enable is selected.
6. The value of the digit is irrelevant when an“X“ appears. Values differing from “X“ (1 or 0) generate trigger.
3-22
218800
218800-8.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Timed Results
3.12
Timed Results The Timed Results are the results of a group of measurements. All the measurements are made in a single test and the results are shown in windows displayed from the Timed Results menu. You can choose which module or modules the tests are performed on (see Setting up the Modules Controlled by the Start button on page 11-2), but not which tests are performed. You can start and stop the measurements by touching Start . You can also choose to make a measurement over a pre-defined period (see Running a Timed Test for a defined period on page 11-2) or delay the start of a test to a time you choose (see Starting a Timed Test at a set time on page 11-2). When the measurements have finished, a results file is automatically created. You can then create a report from this results file (see Creating a Report File on page 8-2). If you want to be able to create a report when a measurement has finished, you must choose to create a results file. If you do not, the results will be available from the Timed Results menu, but no results file will be produced and you cannot create a report. See Creating a Results File on page 8-1. To display a Timed Results window: 1. Display the main menu. 2. Choose the module you are using to test, then Timed Results and then the type of result you want to display. To start a test immediately: 1. From the main menu choose Modules, then Global Start & Autostart, then Open. The Global Start & Autostart window is displayed. 2. From the list of Registered Modules, choose the module you want to use. 3. To start a measurement immediately, touch
Issue 8 - 06/07
.
3-23
218800-8.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Timed Results
3.12.1
Alarm Results The Alarm Results window displays the count of Seconds with Alarm. Counters of events that are not applicable to the current configuration appear grayed.
Figure
3.12
3.12.2
Alarm results
Error Results The Error Results window displays the Count of errors, Errored Seconds and the Rate at which the errors occur. Counters of events that are not applicable to the configuration will appear grayed.
Figure
3-24
3.13
Error results
218800
218800-8.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Timed Results
3.12.3
Pointer Event Results The Pointer Event Results window displays the Count of Pointer Events, Errored Seconds and the Rate at which pointer events occur. The events listed are PJE (Pointer Event Adjustments) NDF (New Data Flag) and INV (Pointer Event Inversions).
3.12.4
FEC Results NOTE:The FEC option will be available in future software and hardware releases.
3.12.5
G.826 Results The G.826 Results window displays a Count of errors, the Rate of errors and an Evaluation column that indicates PASS/FAIL/NA (Not Applicable) with an LED. This information is evaluated for all the performance parameters defined by ITU-T G.826. A global evaluation is displayed in order to indicate if the G.826 objectives programmed for the measurement are being achieved both at the far and near ends. When no objectives are defined by the Recommendation for a parameter (for example EFS), N/A (Not Applicable) is displayed. An indication of the Elapsed Time as a percentage is also displayed. In addition to the standard parameters defined by G.826, Victoria Combo measures the following parameters: •
Error Free Seconds (EFS): the available time without errors, in seconds.
•
Available time Block Errors (ABE): those errored blocks that are received in a period of availability, including those detected in a Severely Errored Second (SES). They are displayed as a ratio of the number of errored blocks to the total number of blocks received.
•
Unavailable time in seconds (UAS): The total unavailable time during the measurement in progress. The Setup button displays the G.826 Objectives window as described in G.826 Objectives on page 3-15.
3.12.6
G.828 Results This window is very similar to the one for G.826 Results (it displays the additional G.828 parameter Severely Errored Period, SEP). See G.826 Results.
Issue 8 - 06/07
3-25
218800-8.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Timed Results
3.12.7
G.829 Results As Recommendation G.829 does not define performance objectives, the results in this window only show the Count of errors and the Rate at both far and near end. The Elapsed Time of the measurement as a percentage of the total time is also displayed. For additional details, see G.826 Results.
3.12.8
M.2101 Results The M.2101 results window displays the near and far end statistics of Count of errors, the Rate, and an Evaluation field that includes the corresponding indication PASS/FAIL/UNCERTAIN/NA (Not Applicable) for each event, with the associated LED.The elapsed time is also displayed. The evaluation indications depend on the programmed S1 & S2 thresholds: •
PASS: ES
•
FAIL: ES>S2
•
UNCERTAIN: S1
•
NA: Not Applicable For additional details, see G.828 Results on page 3-25 and G.826 Results on page 3-25.
3.12.9
M.2110 Recommendation M.2110 describes tests and procedures for bringing international multi-operator paths, sections, and transmission system entities into service. It defines a continuity test and tests of 15 minutes, 2 hours, or 24 hours to check for error performance events (ES, SES and BBE). In the M.2110 window, using the top section, you can program the duration of the measurement and the performance recommendation used as reference for the definition of performance events. In the middle section, a soft LED indicates the history status and current status of the continuity test. The RESET button enables you to reset the history mode. AT the bottom part of the window, there are programming fields for thresholds and the result fields for performance events, and also a pass/fail indication. The field for assigning UAS and the fields for near-end or farend statistics are available when the statistics selected in the Performance field at the top of the window require them.
3-26
218800
218800-8.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 10G Module Performing Functions
3.12.10
3
M.2120 Recommendation M.2120 provides procedures for fault detection and localisation with and without in-service monitoring for international multioperator paths, sections, and transmission systems. These procedures are applicable whatever the technology used. In the M.2120 window, using the top section you can set up the duration of the measurement and the performance recommendation used as reference for the definition of performance events. The fields for programming thresholds are situated in the middle part of the window. Here you can also find the result fields for threshold reports associated with performance events, for both 15-minute and 24-hour tests. The field for assigning UAS and the fields for near-end or far-end statistics are available when the statistics selected in the Performance field at the top of the window require them. Additionally, there is a list that enables you to select threshold reports or reset threshold reports for 15minute tests. At the bottom part of the window, there is a button to open the Report Threshold Viewer window. This window is a viewer for the event log, with time stamp, for threshold reports, with time window for 15 minutes and 24 hours. When an unavailable period is started, this is indicated too, as well as the return to availability. You can also print the file displayed using the Print button at the bottom part of the window.
3.13
Performing Functions As well as the tests and measurements described above, Victoria Combo enables you to perform a set of powerful automatic measurements called functions. These functions take the control of the CPU. When a function is running, the tester will not perform any other measurement until the function has finished.Victoria Combo will not run more than one function at the same time. To display a function window: 1. From the main menu, choose the module you want to use for the test. 2. Choose Functions and then choose function you want to perform.
3.13.1
Autoconfiguration This function automatically configures the receiver of Victoria Combo to the network or device under test: 1. In the Autoconfiguration window, choose the settings you want to autoconfigure. If an item is not enabled, the setting is not checked for autoconfiguration. The Expected Results enable you to choose a previously known or expected configuration to reduce the autoconfiguration time. 2. To start the autoconfiguration, touch Start.
Issue 8 - 06/07
3-27
218800-8.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Performing Functions
3.13.2
Scanning Tributaries The Scan function enables you to scan tributaries for alarms and errors. When you choose the SDH/SONET tributaries to be scanned, the incoming signal is searched for all types of errors and/or alarms in the tributaries you have chosen. The tributaries that can be selected depend on the receiver mapping configuration. 1. In the Scan window select the Scanned Tributaries. An automatic scan of the SDH/SONET tributaries at each level will be enabled. 2. Choose whether you want to scan for Alarms or Errors or both. 3. Touch Start. When the scan is completed for one tributary, it automatically begins for the next one on that level. If no check box is selected, the scan is performed on the tributary that appears on the lists beside the checkboxes. Use Page Number to scroll through the list of events detected.
Figure
3-28
3.14
Scan screen
218800
218800-8.book Page 29 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Performing Functions
3.13.3
Automatic Protection Switching APS Procedures enable the switching of active channels to backup channels if there is a breakdown or the signal is degraded in some way. The backup channel must have been set up previously in the multiplexing section. The time for which service is disrupted (Switch Time: due to switching from one channel to another) is limited and can be measured by Victoria Combo. The Switch Time must be less than 50 ms. The result is calculated by Victoria Combo with a resolution of 1 ms. You can select Triggers to define one of the different types of AIS which starts APS switch time (MS-AIS/AISL, AU-AIS/AIS-P and Pattern AIS). You can also check for the presence of the different AIS conditions by using the Continuity Test LED: •
IDLE: no trigger detected while performing the APS measurement
•
MEASURING: trigger is detected and switch time measurement is being performed
•
OK: valid measurement is displayed
To measure the switch time: 1. In the Automatic Protection Switching window, touch Start. 2. To end the test, touch Stop. The tester returns to its previous state.
3.13.4
Measuring Round Trip Delay You can measure signal delays caused by long transmission paths and delays in networks elements. To start the RTD measurement: 1. In the Round Trip Delay window touch Start. The value of the RTD is displayed in the RTD Measurement field. 2. This measurement is performed repeatedly, therefore when you have finished with this function you must stop it - touch Stop. An LSS (Loss of Sequence Synchronization) alarm LED indicates whether there is a continuity problem with the line being tested. The RTD State field display status information about the measurement.The different RTD status messages are:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
OK - the measurement displayed is valid
•
MEASURING - the measurement displayed is valid but a new measurement has started
•
IDLE - configuring or waiting for a control pattern that is lost: for example when a LOS occurs during the RTD measurement
•
TIMEOUT - the IDLE state has existed for a long time 3-29
218800-8.book Page 30 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
3
Testing with the 10G Module Performing Functions
If you enter a value in the RTD Measurement field and touch Calibrate, this value will be subtracted from the measured value and sets the tester to zero before an RTD measurement. For example, if you make an RTD measurement with the tester looped back and calibrate it using this RTD measurement, the delay due to internal circuits of the tester will be subtracted from the next measurement result. You can enter the maximum acceptable RTD by entering a value in RTD Limit so that you can compare it with the measured value. Note that the values of RTD Measurement, RTD Calibration and RTD Limit are all expressed in microseconds (µs).
3.13.5
Performing an Overhead BER Test The OH BER Test Setup window enables you to set up an error Test on OH Bytes by inserting a Test Pattern into them. 1. In the OH BER Test Setup window choose the OH Bytes you want to perform the test on. 2. Set up the pattern you want to transmit using Test Pattern, PRBS, Fixed Word and User. 3. You can set up the receiver separately or couple the receiver and transmitter using the buttons at the bottom part of the window. 4. From the main menu, choose Modules, then Global Start & Autostart, then Open. The Global Start & Autostart window is displayed. 5. From the list of Registered Modules choose the module you want to test with. 6. To start a measurement immediately, touch
3-30
.
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 2.5G Module
4.1
4
Introduction The STM-16/OC-48 module enables you to perform different measurements on PDH, T-Carrier, SDH and SONET networks at bit rates from 1.5 Mbit/s up to 2.5 Gbit/s. As described in previous chapters, when a module is added to Victoria Combo, a new item is added to the main menu. When you touch this menu item, several new menu items are displayed:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
Save Configuration
•
Load Default Configuration
•
Real-time event log - tracks events with timestamp
•
Real-time histogram - tracks events with a real-time graphical histogram
•
Configuration both the transmitter and the receiver for a test (see Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver on page 4-3).
•
Insertion of errors, alarms and pointer events into the bit stream being transmitted (see Inserting Events on page 4-9).
•
Measurements - including programming error performance objectives, timer and reports of the measurements (see Measurements on page 4-14).
•
Instant Results - the LEDs panels, pointer values, capture of overhead bytes, graphics, FEC results and other information about the measurement (see Displaying Instant Results on page 4-17).
•
Timed Results such as alarms, errors, pointer events, overhead bytes, performance results etc. (see Timed Results on page 4-22).
•
Functions which enable you to perform the following measurements: Autoconfiguration, Scan, APS, RTD, and Overhead BER test setup (see Performing Functions on page 4-26).
•
Save Configuration - saves the current configuration.
4-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module The 2.5G Module Home Screen
4.2
The 2.5G Module Home Screen The module Home screen displays information on the status of the 2.5G Module, the test that is running or the last test run. This screen can be used as a control panel for the test module rather than using the menus. To display the module Home screen: 1. Touch the Main menu button,
, to display the main menu.
2. Choose the 2.5G module, and then choose Home. Touch next to the 2.5G module in the list on the tester Home screen. The module Home screen is displayed. LEDs; for more information see Change LEDs display Transmitter and Receiver Setup Summary LEDs on page 4-17 LEDs
Tx
Rx
Interface:
STM-16
STM-16
Type:
1310 nm
1310 nm
Mapping:
AU-3/ C-12
AU4/ C-12
Setup
Xxxxxx
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
Summary XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
History
Pattern: PRBS23, ITU Tx-Rx Coupled
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Freq. Offset:
Optical Power: -10 dBm
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Xxxxxx
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Measurement and Evaluation
OK Settings & Details
Test status
Figure
4.1
Duration: 100 min.
Rx Tx
SDH
Frequency:
Start/stop test
2,488,320,000 Hz -50
ppm
Errors:
65
Secs.
Alarms:
45
Secs.
AU Ptr:
340
TU Ptr:
550
Overhead Error Detail Alarm Detail Pointers Scan RTD APS
Insertion Event type: B2 Error Mode: Burst 100 Error
Timed Test
Test setup Test progress
Autoconfig.
Results
Xxxxxx
Measuring...
PRBS23, ITU
DUT PDH
XXXX
SDH
XXXX
PDH
XXXX
Generator Analyser
Xxxxxx
Alarm
Test results
Insert event
The 2.5G Module Home screen
To display more details or to change settings, choose one of the buttons on the screen.
4-2
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 2.5G Module Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver
4.3
4
Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver The Setup menu enables you to program the settings for both the transmitter and the receiver. It also enables you to display windows that show the present configuration graphically (Transmitter and Receiver Map). For more information, see The Transmitter and Receiver Maps on page 4-9.
4.3.1
Setting up the Transmitter 1. From the Setup menu, choose Transmitter Setup, then choose Open. The Transmitter Setup window is displayed. 2. First, select the appropriate Network option: SDH/SONET/PDH/T-CAR/G.832. 3. Choose the operation Mode you want to use. This can be Terminated (Generator/Analyzer) or Transparent (passthrough mode). 4. Set the Reference Clock Source (Mainframe or Recovered) and the frequency deviation (Offset) in ppm. Mainframe means that the clock is provided by an internal or external source. This means that you must program this source using the General Timing window of the main menu (see General Timing on page 10-1). 5. Choose the line Rate you want to use - from STM-0/OC-1 to STM-16/OC-48. 6. Select the Code (for electrical connections) or wavelength (1550 nm/1310 nm for optical connections). The wavelength selection is not available for modules with one laser source. For optical connections, Victoria Combo includes interfaces for 155.520, 622.080 and 2,488.320 kbit/s (SC, ST or FC connectors in accordance with ITU-T G.957) and via an external micromodule for 34368, 51840 and 155520 kbit/s (fully G.957 compliant). This module can be connected using the Adapters socket on the 2.5G module. 7. Set the specific Mapping structure that is applicable for the network that you want to test. 8. Set up the tributary that contains the test pattern (Structure & Tributaries under Test) from the available list boxes. Note that criteria for numbering tributaries are Time Slot-TS (according to ITU-T G.707). See Tributary Numbering on page A2-1. 9. Choose the Structure you want to use, this enables you to generate bulk (C-x) and PDH/T-Carrier (Framed and Unframed) mappings. 10.When you select PDH/T-Carrier, Frame is displayed. This enables you to program framed or unframed signals. •
Issue 8 - 06/07
If you touch Frame, the Tx Fractional Signal window is displayed. This enables you to set up E1/T1 fractional programming. 4-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver
•
Touch the Frame button. The Fractional Signal window is displayed.
•
Choose one of the options from Frame. You can select FAS or FAS with CRC frames in fractional E1. In the same way, you can choose SF and ESF frames defined by ANSI T1.403 and SLC-96 in accordance with Bellcore TR-TSY-000008 in Fractional T1.
•
Tick the checkboxes for the channels you want to insert the pattern into. If you do not choose any timeslot, the test pattern will be inserted into all the timeslots (except 0, and if CAS is enabled 16). The buttons All and None at the bottom of the window enable you to select and deselect all the channels. When Fractional T1 is selected you can choose between channels of 64 or 56 kbit/s. An extra list enables you to select the valid states for Robbed Bit. The greater the number of states selected for the robbed bits, the greater the number of bits designated for signalling.
•
Enter the values you want to use in NMFAS and a, b, c and d to program the bytes of Non-Multiframe Alarm Signal and CAS Signalling, respectively. This option is only available if you have chosen CAS (for E1), or if DS1 is set to Robbed Bit other than None. If you have chosen DS1, the number of signalling bits varies depending on the Frame option (SF, ESF, SLC-96). Insert the value you want to use for each digit individually. In the SLC-96 Signalling setup, you can also program C bits (Concentrator Field Bits), S bits (Line Switch Field Bits), M bits (Maintenance Field Bits) and A bits (Alarm Field Bits).
•
If you choose C-12 AU4 Mapping, you can program SDH mapping of 2 Mbit/s in C-12 through AU-4/AU-3
•
Choose ASYNC or SYNC E1 Mode. This enables n x 64 kbit/s channels (Time Slots-TS) and 1,5 Mbit/s in C-11 through AU-4/AU-3 which enables to n x 56 or n x 64 kbit/s.
11.Choose the Test pattern you want to use. You can select a PRBS or word pattern. The pattern can be defined as a PRBS (inverted or non-inverted) or a binary Fixed Word or a userprogrammed word (16-bit word to be programmed in hexadecimal code). If you want to perform a BER test on the OH bytes, choose the test pattern from the Test on OH Byte list. 12.If you want to perform Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM), touch TCM N1. Only choose this if the network under test uses this feature. Make sure that this is not selected if the network does not support TCM.
4-4
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 2.5G Module Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver
4
13.The settings in the Transmitter (Generator) can be copied to the Receiver (Analyser) and vice-versa. To do this, use the three Coupling buttons at the bottom of the window. The button on the left uncouples the setting of both sections (this way the transmitter is fully independent of the receiver). 14.Switch the Optical Transmitter ON by touching the button at the top righthand corner of the window. A red LED with an ON status message is displayed. When the optical transmitter is switched off the status message will change to OFF and the LED turns blue.
Figure
4.2
Transmitter setup screen
Other options, at lower levels, can be displayed by touching the following buttons in the Transmitter Setup window (you can also display these options through the main menu): •
Issue 8 - 06/07
Background: program the type of payload transmitted in the background tributaries. Choose Word to type four hexadecimal characters. Select As main if the information contained in the background tributaries is not important. They will be filled with the same information as the tributary under test programmed in the main Transmitter Setup window.
4-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver
•
OH Bytes: displays and enables you to program a hexadecimal value for the OH bytes of the tributaries (OH Page Number from 1 to 64) being tested. Columns for TU, LP-POH, HP-POH, RSOH and MSOH bytes are displayed (see Displaying Overhead Bytes on page 4-18). Some of the OH Bytes are displayed as buttons containing the corresponding label. This means that you can program them using a description. When you enter the descriptor, the hexadecimal value is entered automatically. The OH Number selected is also displayed. The following OH bytes can be programmed using a description: •
Multiplexer Section Overhead (MSOH/LOH) K1 and K2: Automatic Protection Switching Channel Bytes. Program the APS Topology and select a description from the list. Information about the OH Page Number and the hexadecimal value corresponding to the description is displayed. S1: Synchronisation Status Byte. Select the description from the list. The hexadecimal value is displayed with the OH Page Number.
•
Higher-Order Path Overhead (HP-POH/POH) C2: Signal Label Byte. Displays the mapping being used in the VC-n. G1: Path Status Byte. K3/Z4: APS Signalling (b1-b4). For protection of the VC-4/STS-3c SPE path levels.
•
Lower-Order Path Overhead (LP-POH/VT-OH) V5: Signal Label Byte for low order path. K4: APS Signalling (b1-b4). For protection of the VC-3/STS-1 SPE path levels.
The TU-11/VT-1,5, TU-12/VT-2 and TU-3 pointers (V1, V2, V3, V4) are not programmable, so the current value is always displayed in the screen: •
Pointer Values: program the value of AU/STS Path and TU/VT pointers, as well as the value for SS/XX bits with or without NDF (New Data Flag) in H1 byte.
•
Path Messages: edit messages to be sent in the J0 and J1 trace bytes to check that they are received correctly. You can enable and disable the J0 byte to carry trace messages, as this byte has a dual role - it can act as a C1 or J0 byte (C1 is a number to identify the AUG in the STM-N frame). To do this touch Enable in Transmitted J0 Path Trace Message. Message Type enables you to choose from 16 or 64-character messages (with and without CRC according to ITU-T G.831) messages. When the type of message is not defined by ITU-T G.707, Non ITU is displayed. From this window you can enable TCM (You can also program TCM from the Setup window) and therefore program messages for the HP-APId/TC STS and LP-APId/TC STS labels.
NOTE:Make sure you put the 10 dB optical attenuator in any direct looped connection between the optical transmitter and the optical receiver to prevent damage to the receiver.
4-6
218800
218800-8.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 2.5G Module Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver
4.3.2
4
Setting up the Receiver The Receiver Setup window is very similar to the Transmitter Setup window, there are however some differences. It includes some options that are not present on the Transmitter Setup screen. For example Measurement - this enables you to choose the type of measurement from ISM (In Service Measurement) and OOS (Out-of-Service Measurement). In the first case the receiver configuration screen will display the analysing section only since the Test Pattern analysis will be disabled. The Mode relates to the type of Measurement. It can be either Terminated (Victoria Combo working as generator/analyzer) or Transparent (Victoria Combo working as analyzer and re-transmitting the received signal). The Optical Receiver button enables you to switch the optical receiver on and off. A LED below the button and text displays its status. The Optical Power Limits button enables you to configure the receiver so that when an out-of-range optical signal is detected the detector is switched off. The optical power range can be set in accordance with the ITU Recommendations or you can set it to any other values. The rest of the items in this window are similar to the ones in the Transmitter Setup window.
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
You can select the receiver Wavelength - between 1310 and 1550 nm. Although the receiver has enough bandwidth to cover both wavelengths, in order to measure the optical power accurately we recommend that you should select the one being received.
•
For electrical interfaces you can set the Gain to compensate for the attenuation of Protected Monitoring Points (PMP) or test probes in ISM.
•
If necessary, you can choose if the signal is Framed (CRC, FAS) or not (None). Programming the Fractional E1/T1signal reception and the corresponding signalling is the same as for the transmitter, as is selecting the E1 and T1 time slots. To display the CAS or Robbed bit signalling values for E1 and T1 signals, touch Signalling in the Rx Fractional Signal window.
•
You can display the Expected Message window, where you can enter the message expected so that they can be compared with the messages received.
•
Select the TCM N1 and TCM N2 to switch on Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) tests if the network under test uses this feature. Make sure that this is not selected if the network does not support TCM.
4-7
218800-8.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Figure
4-8
Testing with the 2.5G Module Setting up the Transmitter and Receiver
4.3
Receiver Setup screen
218800
218800-8.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 2.5G Module Inserting Events
4.3.3
4
The Transmitter and Receiver Maps These windows show the multiplexing map for SDH/SONET/PDH/T-Carrier, so that you can see the mapping route you have chosen graphically. It also show the number of the specific tributary under test.
Figure
4.4
4.4
SDH Transmission Map
Inserting Events The Insertion menu items enable you to insert events into the transmitted signal and analyse the effects on the devices under test. You can insert:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
Alarms;
•
Errors;
•
Pointer Sequences.
•
ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequences
4-9
218800-8.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Inserting Events
4.4.1
Inserting Alarms To set up alarm insertion: 1. From the Insertion menu, choose Alarm Insertion, then choose Open. The Alarm Insertion window is displayed. 2. Choose the way you want to insert alarms: •
Off: alarm insertion is disabled
•
Continuous: the alarm condition is inserted permanently
•
M single: a burst of M frames with the alarm condition is inserted
•
M/N Repetitive: a total of N frames are transmitted in a repeated pattern. M frames with the alarm condition are transmitted, followed by N-M frames without the alarm condition. M must be more than 1, equal to or less than 31 and less than or equal to the value of N. N must be between 1 and 232 and an even number.
3. Select the Type of Alarm you want to insert from Line, TCM, PDH or T-Carrier, SDH or SONET, or Pattern. 4. If you want to be able to insert the alarm you have programmed using a button on the desktop, choose Controlled by Desktop. If Victoria Combo has more than one module fitted, you can insert events on more than one interface simultaneously. See Global Action on page 11-3.
Figure
4-10
4.5
Alarm Insertion window
218800
218800-8.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Inserting Events
4.4.2
Inserting Errors To set up error insertion: 1. From the Insertion menu, choose Error Insertion, then choose Open. The Error Insertion window is displayed. 2. Choose the way you want to insert errors: •
Off: error insertion is disabled
•
Single: a single error is inserted
•
Rate: errors are inserted at a fixed rate - Mx10-n (where M=1.1, 1.0, 0.9; and n=3...9)
•
Burst: a burst of errors is inserted (enter the number of errors)
•
Repetitive Burst: a burst of errors per second (enter the number of errors) is inserted continuously.
3. Select the Type of error you want to insert from Line, SDH/SONET, TCM, Pattern or PDH/T-Carrier. If you want to be able to insert the error you have programmed using a button on the desktop, choose Controlled by Desktop. If Victoria Combo has more than one module fitted, you can insert events on more than one interface simultaneously. See Global Action on page 11-3.
Figure
4.6
Issue 8 - 06/07
Error insertion
4-11
218800-8.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Inserting Events
4.4.3
Inserting Pointer Sequences To set up pointer sequence insertion: 1. From the Insertion menu, choose Pointer Sequence Insertion, then choose Open. The Pointer Sequence Insertion window is displayed. 2. Choose the way you want to insert pointer sequences: •
Off: pointer sequence insertion is disabled
•
Single: a single pointer event is inserted
•
Pointer Justification Interval: set the duration of the justification interval in hours (h), minutes (m), seconds (s) and milliseconds (ms)
•
Burst: a burst of pointer events is inserted (enter the number of errors)
•
Repetitive Burst: a burst of pointer events per second (enter the number of pointer events) is inserted continuously.
3. Select the Type of Pointer sequence adjustment to be performed (AU or TU). 4. Select the Type of Event adjustment to be performed. There are different types of pointer events, INC, DEC, INV (Increment, Decrement or Inversion) to stress the pointer processing circuits in the network. 5. If you want to program specific pointer sequences in accordance with the recommendation G.783, touch ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequence. 6. If you want to be able to insert the pointer sequence you have programmed using a button on the desktop, choose Controlled by Desktop. If Victoria Combo has more than one module fitted, you can insert events on more than one interface simultaneously. See Global Action on page 113.
4-12
218800
218800-8.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 2.5G Module Inserting Events
Figure
4.7
4.4.4
4
Pointer Sequence Insertion
Inserting ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequences To set up ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequence insertion: 1. From the Insertion menu, choose Pointer Sequence Insertion, then choose G.783 Pointer Sequence. The ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequence Insertion window is displayed.
Figure
4.8
Issue 8 - 06/07
ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequence Insertion
4-13
218800-8.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Measurements
2. Select the Type of Pointer you want to use (AU or TU). 3. Select the Type of Sequence you want to insert. The ITU-T G.783 recommendation define two types of sequences: Single and Burst sequences or Periodic sequences. 4. Set up the Initialisation, Cool-down, PLL and Exception Time periods, depending on the selected sequence. You can also program other values by entering the values and the units (seconds, milliseconds...). You can also insert a payload justification of the PDH and T-Carrier tributaries if you want to. 5. If you want to be able to insert the pointer sequence you have programmed using a button on the desktop, choose Controlled by Desktop. If Victoria Combo has more than one module fitted, you can insert events on more than one interface simultaneously. See Global Action on page 11-3
4.5
Measurements The Measurements menu enables you to set up the following:
4.5.1
•
Auto Measurement Timer
•
Measurement Macro Setup
•
G.821 Objectives
•
G.826 Objectives
•
G.828 Objectives
•
G.829 Objectives
•
M.2100 Objectives
•
M.2101 Objectives
Using the Auto Measurement Timer See Using the Auto Measurement Timer on page 3-12.
4.5.2
Setting up a Measurement Macro Setup See Setting up a Measurement Macro on page 3-13.
4-14
218800
218800-8.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 2.5G Module Setting Objectives
4.6
4
Setting Objectives All the objectives on Victoria Combo are set up in a similar way, as described below. For information on settings or results for specific objectives, see the pages in the table below. To set up objectives: 1. From the Measurements menu, choose the menu item for the objective you want to set, then choose Open. The appropriate objective window is displayed. 2. To set the test duration, touch Test Period Setup and set up the duration. This this is the time for which Victoria Combo evaluates the value of the parameters and checks if the objectives are being achieved. 3. Choose Enable at the bottom of the window. This will allow you to program the objective. 4. Select the objective Type you want to program. 5. Enter the Allocation (as a percentage of the global objective assigned to the Hypothetical Reference Path: 27,500 km). This is not applicable to G.829 objectives. 6. Set up the other parameters for the objective, if applicable. 7. If you want to set up the objectives in detail, touch the button Objectives button. The Threshold column enables you to programme event thresholds in absolute units (seconds or blocs), if desired. This is not applicable to G.829 objectives. 8. Choose one of the UAS Assignment options (this is not applicable to G.829 or G.821objectives): •
Split: evaluation of UAS (Unavailable Seconds) in both directions of the bidirectional path.
•
Path: analysis of UAS just in one direction.
9. Touch Results to display a window containing results. For information on the specific objectives and results, see the pages in the table below:
Issue 8 - 06/07
Setting up Objectives
Results
G.821
page 4-16
page 4-24
G.826
page 3-15
page 3-25
G.828
page 3-15
page 3-25
G.829
page 3-15
page 3-26
M.2100
page 4-16
page 4-24
M.2101
page 3-16
page 3-26
4-15
218800-8.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Setting Objectives
4.6.1
G.821 Objectives The ITU-T G.821 objectives provide monitoring criteria and performance objectives for international digital paths working at a constant bit rate lower than 2 Mbit/s.
4.6.2
Type
Comment
BIT
Current version
Annex D
Old version (1988)
M.2100 Objectives The M.2101 objectives measurement covers error performance for bringing into service and maintenance of PDH paths and connections. The type of M.2100 measurements available are listed below: Type
Comment
CRC
For E1 applications only. Based on CRC-4 EDC
FAS
For PDH applications. Based on FAS errors.
PPAR
For DS1 applications only. Based on P-Parity code.
CPAR
For DS1 applications only. Based on C-Parity code.
Select BIS (Bringing-into-Service) to set objective BIS default thresholds for M.2101 measurement, otherwise, the default thresholds will correspond to a Maintenance M.2100 measurement.
4-16
218800
218800-8.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
4.7
Displaying Instant Results Instant results are results of tests that are not timed. They are test results that are displayed on the screen automatically and updated continuously. They do not involve starting or stopping a measurement.
4.7.1
LEDs Events that are being detected can first be displayed using the different LED screens and then the number of events displayed on the corresponding Result screens. For more information see Timed Results on page 4-22. The LEDs may be four colours: •
Green: no anomaly or defect
•
Red: defect (Alarm)
•
Yellow: anomaly (Error)
•
White: The event is not relevant to the present configuration. Hierarchical inhibition (the event is inhibited by another from a higher level) may also mean that an LED is white. Victoria Combo has three types of LED windows - Current, History, Summary:
•
Summary mode enables you to see if any event has occurred in Current LEDS window and/or History LEDS window but without specifying which one it is (to see this information you must display the Current LEDS or History LEDS window). The Reset History button in this window enables you to reset the LEDs in this window and the History LEDS window.
•
History LEDS window, if an event is detected the colour of the LED will remain the same until you touch the Reset History button or the tester is switched off.
•
Current LEDS window, the colour of the LED changes (from yellow to green and vice versa) as the event is detected and is not detected. In the LED windows the LEDs are grouped in rows according to the type of event (Pattern, System, TCM, etc.) that they give information about.
Issue 8 - 06/07
4-17
218800-8.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
Figure
4.7.2
4.9
Current LEDs
Measuring Optical Power For information, see Measuring Optical Power on page 3-17.
4.7.3
Measuring Signal Frequency For information, see Measuring Signal Frequency on page 3-18.
4.7.4
Displaying Overhead Bytes Victoria Combo displays the overhead bytes of the STM-16 signal on different OH pages. You can display the different pages using the arrows next to the OH Page Number. Each OH page corresponds to the overhead in each one of the 16 STM-1/OC-3 tributaries that make up an STM-16/OC-48 frame, or the 4 STM-1/OC-3 tributaries that make up an STM-4/OC-12 frame, or the STM-1/OC-3 frame. Then, the value of the OH Page Number goes from 1 to 16, 4 or is fixed to 1, respectively. The columns displayed on the pages depend on the mapping configuration. The bytes transporting messages are highlighted by labelled buttons. To display the messages, touch the button you want to display the message for.
4-18
218800
218800-8.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
There are two windows displaying: •
messages carried by the SOH/LOH bytes C1, K1, K2 and S1, and
•
messages carried by the higher order path/STS-path OH bytes C2, G1, H4 and K3/Z3 or
•
the lower-order path /VT-path OH bytes V5 and K4/Z7. For example, the K1 byte used for Automatic Protection Switching displays a window with its hexadecimal value and a description of the function programmed in the Overhead Bytes Setup window. In this particular case, the APS topology of the network (Ring or Linear) is also displayed.
Figure
4.10
Issue 8 - 06/07
Overhead byte results
4-19
218800-8.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
4.7.5
Displaying Path Trace Messages This window is similar to that for the 10G module (see Displaying Path Trace Message Results on page 3-22). There are additional items in the window for the 2.5G module:
Figure
4.7.6
4.11
•
The lower-order path/VT path trace messages. These can be 64 or 16 byte messages.
•
You can enable or disable the J0 byte to carry trace messages because the this byte has dual role - it may be used as the C1 or J0 byte (C1 is a number to identify the AUG in the STM-N frame). To switch on the J0 trace message, choose Enable in the Received Path Trace Messages Results. You can also display the messages from J1 or J2 bytes by choosing from the Analysed message list (J1 for higher-order/STS paths, J1/J2 for lower order paths/VT paths.
Path Trace Messages Results
Signalling Results When E1 or DS1 signals mapped into containers are being analysed, Victoria Combo can display the signalling values, for CAS and Robbed bit. For more information about E1 and DS1 signalling, see Setting up the Transmitter on page 4-3.
4-20
218800
218800-8.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
4.7.7
4
Pointer Values The Pointer Value window enables you to display the AU and TU pointer values programmed, and to transmit AU and TU pointers with specific values. 1. From the Instant Results menu choose Pointer Value, then choose Open. The Pointer Value window is displayed. Received Pointers displays the programmed AU pointer value, and the SS/XX unspecified bits that indicate the type of AU/STS-N.There is also an In-Range/Out-of-Range indication and a LED displaying Loss of Pointer (LOP) alarm status. 2. To set the pointer value in the transmitted frame, enter the values in the Transmitted Pointer fields. 3. Choose whether you want to transmit the pointers with or without an NDF (New Data Flag).
Figure
4.12
Issue 8 - 06/07
Pointer Value results
4-21
218800-8.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Timed Results
4.8
Timed Results The Timed Results are the results of a group of measurements. All the measurements are made in a single test and the results are displayed in windows displayed from the Timed Results menu. You can choose which module or modules the tests are performed on (see Setting up the Modules Controlled by the Start button on page 11-2), but not which tests are performed. You can start and stop the measurements by touching Start, . You can also choose to make a measurement over a pre-defined period (see Running a Timed Test for a defined period on page 11-2) or delay the start of a test to a time you choose (see Starting a Timed Test at a set time on page 11-2). When the measurements have finished, a results file is automatically created. You can then create a report from this results file (see Creating a Report File on page 8-2). If you want to be able to create a report when a measurement has finished, you must choose to create a results file. If you do not, the results will be available from the Timed Results menu, but no results file will be produced and you cannot create a report (see Creating a Results File on page 8-1). To display a Timed Results window: 1. From the main menu, choose the module you are using to test. 2. Choose Timed Results and then the type of result you want to display. To start a test immediately: 1. From the main menu, choose Modules. 2. Choose Global Start & Autostart, then Open. The Global Start & Autostart window is displayed. 3. From the list of Registered Modules, choose the module you want to test with. 4. To start a measurement immediately, touch
4-22
.
218800
218800-8.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 2.5G Module Timed Results
4.8.1
4
Alarm Results The Alarm Results windows display the number of Seconds with Alarms for the different alarm types. Counters of alarms that are not applicable are greyed. The Alarm Results windows are: •
Alarm Results
•
Alarm Results/TCM
•
Alarm Results PDH
•
Alarm Results TCAR
4.8.2
Error Results The Error Results windows display a Count of errors detected, the number of Errored Seconds detected and the error Rate the for the different types of error. Counters of errors that are not applicable are greyed. The Error Results windows are:
4.8.3
•
Error Results
•
Error Results/TCM
•
Error Results PDH
•
Error Results TCAR
Pointer Event Results This window displays the AU and TU Count of Pointer Events, Errored Seconds and the Rate at which pointer events occur. The events listed are PJE (Pointer Event Adjustments) NDF (New Data Flag) and INV (Pointer Event Inversions).
Figure
4.13
Issue 8 - 06/07
Pointer Event Results
4-23
218800-8.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Timed Results
4.8.4
G.821 Results The G.821 Results window displays a Count of errors, the Rate of errors and an Evaluation column that indicates PASS/FAIL/NA (Not Applicable) with a LED. This information is evaluated for all the performance parameters defined by ITU-T G.821. A global evaluation is displayed to indicate if the G.821 objectives programmed for the measurement are being achieved. When no objectives are defined by the Recommendation for a parameter (for example EFS), N/A (Not Applicable) is displayed. An indication of the Elapsed Time as a percentage is also displayed. In addition to the standard parameters defined by G.821, Victoria Combo measures the following parameters: •
Error Free Seconds (EFS): the available time without errors, in seconds.
•
Background errors (BE): The number of errored bits received in an available period, excluding those detected in an SES (Severely Errored Second). This is displayed as a ratio between the background errored bits and the total number of bits received.
•
Errored bits in available time (AE): The number of errored bits received in an available period, including those detected in an SES (Severely Errored Second). This is displayed as a ratio between the errored bits and the total number of bits received.
•
Degraded minutes (DM): A degraded minute is a minute with a BER>10 -6.
•
Unavailable time in seconds (UAS): The accumulated unavailable time
This parameter applies only for Annex-D type G.821 measurements. throughout the measurement, in accordance with the above definition. The Setup button displays the G.826 Objectives window as described in G.821 Objectives on page 4-16.
4.8.5
M.2100 Results As in the error performance results windows described above, this window displays the Near End and Far End statistics of Count of errors, the Rate, and an Evaluation field that includes the corresponding indication PASS/FAIL/UNCERTAIN/NA (Not Applicable) for each event, with an associated LED.The elapsed time is also displayed. The evaluation indications depend on the programmed S1 & S2 thresholds:
4-24
•
PASS: ES
•
FAIL: ES>S2
•
UNCERTAIN: S1
218800
218800-8.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Timed Results
•
NA: Not Applicable In addition to those parameters relating to the M.2100 standard, Victoria Combo measures the following parameters:
•
•
Background Block Errors (BBE): The number of CRC or FAS errors received in an available period, excluding those detected in an SES. They are displayed as a ratio between:
•
the number of CRC background errors detected and the total number of CRC blocks received, for M.2100 CRC based measurements;
•
the number of FAS background errors detected and the total number of frame alignment bits received, for M.2100 FAS based measurements.
Block Errors in Available time (ABE): The number of CRC or FAS errors received in an available period, including those detected in an SES. They are displayed as a ratio between:
•
the number of CRC errors detected and the total number of CRC blocks received, for M.2100 CRC based measurements;
•
the number of FAS errors detected and the total number of frame alignment bits received, for M.2100 FAS based measurements.
The Setup button displays the M.2100 Objectives window as described in M.2100 Objectives on page 4-16.
4.8.6
M.2110 The Recommendation M.2110 describes tests and procedures for bringing international multi-operator paths, sections, and transmission system entities into service. It defines a continuity test and tests of 15 minutes, 2 hours, or 24 hours to check for error performance events (ES, SES and BBE). In the M.2110 window, using the top section, you can program the duration of the measurement, and the performance recommendation used as reference for the definition of performance events. In the middle section, a soft LED indicates the history status and current status of the continuity test. By pressing the RESET button, you can reset the history mode. In the bottom part of the window, there are programming fields for thresholds and the result fields for performance events, and also a pass/fail indication. The field for assigning UAS and the fields for near-end or far-end statistics are available when the statistics selected in the Performance field at the top of the window require them.
Issue 8 - 06/07
4-25
218800-8.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Performing Functions
4.8.7
M.2120 The Recommendation M.2120 provides procedures for fault detection and localization with and without in-service monitoring for international multioperator paths, sections, and transmission systems. These procedures are applicable whatever the technology used. In the M.2120 window, using the top section, you can program the duration of the measurement and the performance recommendation used as reference for the definition of performance events. In the middle section, there are fields for programming thresholds. There are also the results fields for threshold reports associated with performance events, for both the 15-minute and for 24-hour tests. The field for assigning UAS and the fields for near-end or far-end statistics are available when the statistics selected in the Performance field at the top of the window require them. Additionally, a list enables you to select threshold reports or reset threshold reports for 15-minute tests. In the bottom section of the window, there is a button to open the window Report Threshold Viewer. This window is a viewer for the event log, with time stamp, for threshold reports, with time window for 15 minutes and 24 hours. When an unavailable period is started, this is indicated too, as well as the return to availability. In addition, you also can print the file displayed using the Print button at the bottom of the window.
4.8.8
Other Results For information on other results, see the following pages:
4.9
•
G.826 Results - page 3-25
•
G.828 Results - page 3-25
•
G.829 Results - page 3-26
•
M.2101 Results - page 3-26
Performing Functions As well as the tests and measurements described above, Victoria Combo enables you to perform a set of powerful automatic measurements called Functions. These Functions take the control of the CPU. When a Function is running, the tester will not perform any other measurement until the Function has finished.Victoria Combo will not run more than one function at the same time.
4-26
218800
218800-8.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the 2.5G Module Performing Functions
4
To display a function window: 1. From the main menu, choose the module you want to use for the test. 2. Choose Functions, then choose the function you want to perform.
4.9.1
Autoconfiguration This function autoconfigures the receiver of the Victoria Combo to the network or device under test. You can autoconfigure the Rate, Network, Gain, Structure, Frame and PRBS: 1. In the Autoconfiguration window choose the settings you want to autoconfigure. If an item is not enabled, the setting is not checked for autoconfiguration. The Expected Results enable you to choose a previously known or expected configuration to minimise the autoconfiguration time. 2. To start the autoconfiguration, touch Start.
Figure
4.14
4.9.2
Autoconfiguration function
Scanning Tributaries See Scanning Tributaries on page 3-28.
Issue 8 - 06/07
4-27
218800-8.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
4
Testing with the 2.5G Module Performing Functions
4.9.3
Automatic Protection Switching APS Procedures allow the switching of active channels to backup channels if there is a breakdown or the signal is degraded in some way. The backup channel must have previously been set up in the multiplexing section. The time for which service is disrupted (Switch Time: due to switching from one channel to another) is limited and can be measured by Victoria Combo. This Switch Time must be less than 50 ms. The result is calculated by Victoria Combo with a resolution of 1ms. Victoria Combo enables you to select Triggers to define one of the different types of AIS which starts APS switch time (MS-AIS/AIS-L, AU-AIS/AIS-P, TU-AIS/AIS-V, B1 errors and B2 errors). You can also check for the presence of the different AIS conditions using the Continuity Test LED. •
IDLE: no trigger detected while performing the APS measurement
•
MEASURING: trigger is detected and switch time measurement of the is being performed
•
OK: valid measurement is displayed To measure the switch time:
1. In the Automatic Protection Switching window touch Start. 2. To end the test, touch Stop. The tester returns to its previous state.
4.9.4
Measuring Round Trip Delay See Measuring Round Trip Delay on page 4-28.
4.9.5
Performing an Overhead BER Test See Performing an Overhead BER Test on page 4-28.
4-28
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module
5.1
5
Introduction The STM-16/OC-48 NG SDH module enables you to perform a wide range of measurements on SDH and SONET next generation networks at bit rates from 52 Mbit/s up to 2.5 Gbit/s. PDH and TCAR networks working at bit rates from 1.5 Mbit/s to 140 Mbit/s can be also tested with the same module.
5.1.1
About Next Generation SDH/SONET The purpose of the changes in SDH and SONET to create the Next Generation protocols is to enable data traffic such as Ethernet to be carried more easily and efficiently over SDH and SONET networks:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
The GFP (Generic Framing Procedure) is a protocol for carrying packets over an SDH/SONET network. With Victoria Combo you can test networks using GFP-F. This is a layer-2 protocol that has a low overhead and hence carries data efficiently.
•
When using classical SDH/SONET, bandwidth usage may be very inefficient when carrying Ethernet traffic at commonly used rates. For example, when Gigabit Ethernet traffic is carried using VC-4-16c containers the efficiency is only 42%. Virtual Concatenation (VCAT) enables the SDH/SONET bandwidth to be matched more closely to the bandwidth required. In this example using VC-4-7v increases efficiency to 95%.
•
When classical SDH/SONET is used, the bandwidth of a link cannot be changed dynamically. This means that a business that uses a link during the day has access to that link both day and night. The GFP enables the bandwidth to be varied dynamically over time, matching the requirements of the users. 5-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module The NG 2.5G Module Control Panel Screen
5.1.2
The NG 2.5G Module As described in previous chapters, when a module is added to Victoria Combo, a new item is added to the main menu. When you touch this menu item several new menu items are displayed:
5.2
•
Save Configuration
•
Load Default Configuration
•
Real-time event log - tracks events with timestamp
•
Real-time histogram - tracks events with a real-time graphical histogram
•
Control panel - see The NG 2.5G Module Control Panel Screen on page 5-2.
•
Configuration - Set up both the transmitter and the receiver for a test (see Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup on page 5-5).
•
Insertion - inserts different classes of events into the data flow.
•
Measurements - including programming error performance objectives, timer and reports of the measurements (see Measurements on page 5-30).
•
Instant Results - the LEDs panels, pointer values, capture of overhead bytes, graphics and other information about the measurement (see Displaying Instant Results on page 5-30).
•
Timed Results, such as alarms, errors, pointer events, overhead bytes, performance results and so on, see Timed Results on page 5-38.
•
Functions - miscellaneous tests such as autoconfiguration, scan, VCAT Delays, GFP Autodetection or RFC 2544 measurement.
•
Options - displays the options installed on your Victoria Combo.
The NG 2.5G Module Control Panel Screen The module Home screens display information on the status of the NG 2.5 module and the test that is running or the last test run. These screens can be used as control panels for the test module rather than using the menus. To display the module Home screen: 1. Touch the Main menu button, The main menu is displayed.
.
2. Choose the nextg module, and then choose Control Panel. The Home screen is displayed. NOTE:There are two Home screens, displaying a summary of the module setup and a summary of the current test or last test performed. 3. To change between the two Home screens, touch Go to Test Summary or Go to Setup Summary.
5-2
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module The NG 2.5G Module Control Panel Screen
LEDs; for more information see LEDs on page 5-31
Test status
Figure
5.1
Issue 8 - 06/07
Test setup
Change LEDs display
Test events
5
Change to Setup Summary
Test results
NG 2.5 Test Summary Home screen
5-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module The NG 2.5G Module Control Panel Screen
LEDs for background tributaries
Test progress
Figure
5.2
Transmitter and Receiver setup Change to Test Summary
LEDs for TCM
Quick links
Diagram of current Test mode
NG 2.5 Setup Summary Home screen
To display more details or to change settings, choose one of the buttons on the screen.
5-4
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
5.3
5
Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
5.3.1
Choosing the Physical Settings The NG 2.5G module enables you to transmit different types of traffic, such as SDH/SONET, GFP frames mapped over SDH/SONET, or Ethernet frames mapped on GFP over SDH/SONET. Before you start testing, you must set up the transmitter. 1. From the NG 2.5 Setup Summary Control Panel, choose Setup Tx. OR From the Configuration menu for the Nextg module, choose Transmitter Setup, then choose Open. The Transmitter Setup window is displayed.
Figure
5.3
Transmitter Setup window
2. Select the appropriate Network option (SDH/SONET/PDH/TCAR) for the network you are testing. 3. Choose the Mode you want to use Victoria Combo in: Terminal or Transparent.
Issue 8 - 06/07
5-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
4. Choose the line Rate you want to use: •
STM1-OC3, STM-4/OC-12 or STM-16/OC-48 for SDH/SONET.
•
E1, E2, E3 or E4 for PDH
•
DS-1, DS-3 for TCAR
5. Set the Reference Clock Source (Mainframe or Recovered) and the frequency deviation (Offset) in ppm. Mainframe means that the clock is provided by an internal or external source, this means that you must program this source using the General Timing window of the main menu (see General Timing on page 10-1). 6. Select the wavelength 1550 nm/1310 nm for optical connections or the line code for electrical connections. Wavelength selection is not be available for modules with one laser source. For optical connections, Victoria Combo includes interfaces for 155.520, 622.080 and 2,488.320 kbit/s. (SC, ST or FC connectors in accordance with ITU-T G.957).
5.3.2
Setting up PDH and T-Carrier Victoria Combo’s NG 2.5G module enables you to test native T-Carrier and PDH signals or SDH/SONET mapped T-Carrier and PDH frames. Before you start testing you must set up the transmitter. To test native PDH or T-Carrier signals: 1. Choose PDH or TCAR in the Network menu 2. Set the framing for the PDH or T-Carrier signal. You can choose between: •
None, FAS or CRC for E-1 signals,
•
None or FAS for E-2, E-3 and E-4 signals
•
None, SF, ESF or SLC96 for DS-1 signals, SF and ESF frames defined by ANSI T1.403 and SLC-96 in accordance with Bellcore TR-TSY-000008.
•
None, M13 or CBIT for DS-3 signals.
3. If you have configured E-1 or DS-1, touch the Frame button. The Fractional Signal window is displayed.
5-6
•
Choose one of the options from Frame when needed.
•
To carry out a fractional E1 test, tick the Fractional E1 checkbox Tick the checkboxes for the channels you want to insert the test pattern into. Press All to select all the channels and None to deselect all the channels. Tick the CAS checkbox and then NMFAS and a,b,c,d configuration values to set CAS signalling in the transmitted signal.
218800
218800-8.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
•
To carry out a fractional DS-1, tick the Fractional T1 checkbox Tick the checkboxes for the channels you want to insert the test pattern into. Press All to select all the channels and None to deselect all the channels. Set the channel bit rate in the Channels menu, the robbed bit options in the Robbed Bit menu and the Signalling options by means of the signalling button.
4. Choose the Test pattern you want to use. You can select a PRBS or word pattern. The pattern can be defined as a PRBS (inverted or non inverted) or a binary Fixed Word or a userprogrammed word (16-bit word to be programmed in Hexadecimal code). To test SDH/SONET mapped T-Carrier or PDH frames: 1. Choose SDH or SONET in the Network menu. 2. Set a Normal Mapping. 3. Set PDH or TCAR in the Structure menu when these options are available. 4. Choose SYNC or ASYNC in the E1 mode menu for framed PDH signals mapped in C-12/VT-2 payloads. 5. Set the framing for the PDH or T-Carrier signal. You can choose between: •
None, FAS or CRC for E-1 signals
•
None or FAS for E-2, E-3 and E-4 signals
•
None, SF, ESF or SLC96 for DS-1 signals, SF and ESF frames defined by ANSI T1.403 and SLC-96 in accordance with Bellcore TR-TSY-000008.
•
None, M13 or CBIT for DS-3 signals
6. If you have configured E-1 or DS-1, touch the Frame button. The Fractional Signal window is displayed.
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
Choose one of the options from Frame when needed.
•
To carry out a fractional E1 test, tick the Fractional E1 checkbox. Tick the checkboxes for the channels you want to insert the test pattern into. Press All to select all the channels and None to deselect all the channels. Tick the CAS checkbox and then NMFAS and a,b,c,d configuration values to set CAS signalling in the transmitted signal.
•
To carry out a fractional DS-1, tick the Fractional T1 checkbox Tick the checkboxes for the channels you want to insert the test pattern into. Press All to select all the channels and None to deselect all the channels. Set the channel bit rate in the Channels menu, the robbed bit options in the Robbed Bit menu and the signalling options by means of the signalling button.
5-7
218800-8.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
7. Choose the Test pattern you want to use. You can select a PRBS or word pattern. The pattern can be defined as a PRBS (inverted or non-inverted) or a binary Fixed Word or a userprogrammed word (16-bit word to be programmed in Hexadecimal code).
5.3.3
Setting up Virtual Concatenation (VCAT) To set up Virtual Concatenation (VCAT): 1. Set the specific Mapping Type that is applicable for the network that you want to test. If you want to test a Next Generation network that uses virtual concatenation, choose the HO Virtual or LO Virtual mapping type. Select Normal if you want to use a normal container or contiguously concatenated container (VC-3/SPE-1, VC-4/SPE-3c, VC-4-4c/SPE-12c, VC-4-16c/SPE-48c). For information on setting up NORMAL mapping, see Setting up the Transmitter on page 4-3. 2. If you have selected Virtual Mapping: from the Mapping list choose the type of virtual containers you want to transmit: •
C-4-AU4-Xv or C-3-AU3-Xv for HO Virtual Mapping Type
•
C-3-AU4-Xv, C-12-AU4-Xv, C-11-AU4-Xv, C12-AU3-Xv, C11-AU3-Xv for LO Virtual Mapping Type
3. Choose the number of members you want to split each virtual container into (X). 4. Choose VCAT Setup to start to set up the virtual concatenation.
5-8
•
Choose the Member of the virtual container you want to use for insertion. This is the member of the virtual container that is used when you choose to insert events.
•
Enter the Sequence ID number for each of the members of the group. The members of the group are multiplexed and demultiplexed on a byte by byte basis. The sequence number is the order that the member will be processed in. For example, the first byte from the member with sequence number 1, then the first byte from the member with sequence number 2, and so on.
•
Enter which tributaries within the STM-1 or STM-4 containers you want to be members of the virtual concatenation group (Tributary number). The tributary numbers do not need to be the first X available VC-n and they do not need to be contiguous. For example, one possible option is to choose the VC-4s labelled with tributary numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 14, 16 to be members of a particular VC-4-8v. When the multiplexing structure of the members of the VCAT group has two levels, a third column is shown in the Tx VCAT Setup panel.
218800
218800-8.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
5
This column shows the coordinates of every member inside the twolevel multiplexing structure.
Figure
5.4
Virtual Concatenation Setup screen
5. Select LCAS enable if you want to enable the LCAS source and sink emulation functions in the tester. The Setup and Status Summary buttons provide detailed configuration of the LCAS functionality (see Setting up the LCAS on page 5-10). 6. In the Transmitter Setup window, choose the Structure you want to use. This enables you to fill the container with test sequence bulk (C-x) or mapping GFP frames on it. If you choose GFP, a new button is displayed that enables you to program GFP transmission. If you choose C-x, the SDH structure is filled with a test sequence. At the bottom of the screen you can select the type of test pattern used to fill the SDH container and perform a physical BER.
Issue 8 - 06/07
5-9
218800-8.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
5.3.4
Setting up the LCAS 1. Set up the LCAS source and sink timers and thresholds from the Setup button next to LCAS enable. The following dialog is displayed.
Figure
5.5
LCAS Setup screen
2. Setup the timers and thresholds Source configuration
UMST Detection time-out - Unexpected member status detection time-out.
UMST Clear time-out - Unexpected member status clear time-out. RS-Ack time-out - (Re-sequence acknowledge time-out): time-out for the message sent from sink to source to indicate the changes requested by the Tx are done. Partial Loss of Capacity Receive Threshold - Minimum number of active members of VCAT group allowed before an alarm in Tx is activated.
Sink configuration
Wait-to-restore timer - Time period between the restoration of a failed section and the time when the section is used again by a working channel. This period is called wait-to-restore (WTR). Hold-off timer - The time between declaration of signal degrade or signal fail, and the initialization of the protection switching algorithm. Partial Loss of Capacity Transmit Threshold - Minimum number of active members of VCAT group allowed before an alarm in Rx is activated.
5-10
218800
218800-8.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
5
3. Choose the Status Summary button. The following dialog is displayed.
Figure
5.6
LCAS Status Summary screen
4. Add or remove members to the provisioned group of members with the LCAS Actions controls. First choose the member of the VCG to be added or removed from the group of members to be provisioned by selecting the right member tributary number below the Member label. 5. Add or remove the member with the ADD and REMOVE buttons. All members can be added or removed at the same time with the ADD all and REMOVE all buttons. Repeat the operation for the Sink and for the Source. 6. Get information about any member of the VCG with the Member State controls. First choose the member of the VCG you want to monitor by selecting the right member tributary number with the control next to the Member label.
Issue 8 - 06/07
5-11
218800-8.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
The following information is available:
Source Summary State - Current state of source.
Source member state
CTRL - State of the individual member of the group. Also, this field is used to request the add and removal of VCG members. The possible commands displayed are: FIXED (non-LCAS mode), ADD, NORM, EoS, IDLE, DNU. SQ - It contains the number of sequence assigned to a particular member. Each member of a VCG has a unique SQ always starting in 0. Rec. MST - (Received Member Status) state of all the members of the received VCG. It is transmitted in all the members of the transmitted VCG.
Sink Summary State - Current state of sink.
Member state
CTRL - see Source member state SQ - see Source member state Trans. MST - (Transmitted Member Status) state of all the members of the transmitted VCG. It is transmitted in all the members of the transmitted VCG.
You can monitor all members at the same time by pressing the VCG Overv. button. In this case the following read-only dialog is displayed.
Figure
5-12
5.7
LCAS Detail screen
218800
218800-8.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
5
7. The LCAS Status Summary panel displays general information about the VCG members at the source and the sink: VCG Size
Number of members reserved for the Virtually Concatenated Group to be created
Provisioned
Number of members from the reserved ones defined to be used (or added) for the Virtually Concatenated Group
In use
Number of members really being used by the VCG (because some of the provisioned can fail)
5.3.5
Choosing the GFP Settings To choose the Generic Framing Protocol (GFP) settings, do the following: 1. To set up the GFP, choose GFP Configuration. OR In the NG 2.5 Setup Summary Home screen, in the GFP-F section, choose Tx. The following dialog is displayed:
Figure
5.8
Issue 8 - 06/07
GFP Transmitter Setup screen
5-13
218800-8.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
2. Set up the GFP: Transport Mode
This is always set to Framed.
Core Header
This is always set to ON.
Payload Header
PTI - (Payload Type Identifier) this is always set to Client Data. PFI - (Payload FCS Indicator) choose whether a FCS (Frame Check Sum) is included in the GFP frame. EXI - (Extension Header Identifier) choose from no EXI (null) or Linear Frame. UPI - (User Payload Identifier) choose the type of traffic you want to transmit. Choose the value of the label for the type of traffic to be carried by the GFP frames. By default the value Frame-mapped Ethernet should be selected when you want to transmit Ethernet traffic or Reserved for proprietary use when you want to fill the GFP with a PRBS. Scrambling - switches scrambling of the payload header on and off.
Payload
Choose whether you want to transmit Test traffic, or Ethernet.
Choosing the Test Setup If you want to transmit SDH or SONET traffic rather than Ethernet frames, you must set up the type of traffic to be transmitted: 1. Choose Test Setup. The following dialog is displayed.
Figure
5.9
Tx Test Pattern Setup screen
2. Choose the Type of Test pattern you want to use. You can select a PRBS, fixed, or word pattern. The pattern can be defined as a PRBS (inverted or non-inverted) or a binary Fixed Word or a userprogrammed word (16-bit word to be programmed in Hexadecimal code). If you want to perform a BER test on the OH bytes, choose the test pattern from the Test on OH Byte list.
5-14
218800
218800-8.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
5.3.6
Choosing the Ethernet Settings If you have chosen to transmit an Ethernet Payload, you must set up the Ethernet traffic:
Figure
5.10
Ethernet Transmitter Setup screen
1. Choose Ethernet Setup. OR In the NG 2.5 Setup Summary Home screen, Ethernet section, choose Tx. The Ethernet Transmitter Setup screen is displayed. 2. Choose the Ethernet transmission Mode:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
Internal generator if you want to transmit test traffic generated by the tester
•
Traffic loop if you want to transmit the same Ethernet traffic received at one of the signal input interfaces of the module. The status of the temporary storage buffer for the loopback traffic is shown by the Loopback Overflow LED.
5-15
218800-8.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
3. Set up the Ethernet traffic: Ethernet Frame
Choose the type of Ethernet frames you want to transmit - 802.3 LLC-1 802.2 or Ethernet II.
MAC
Destination MAC Address - enter the destination MAC address for the frames you want to transmit Source MAC Address - enter the source MAC address for the traffic you want to transmit. Ether Type - (only displayed when you choose Ethernet II), enter the Ethertype (protocol identifier) for the Ethernet traffic you want to transmit.
VLAN
VLAN - (Virtual Local Area Network), choose whether Victoria Combo is going to transmit the traffic onto a VLAN. Priority - enter the priority level of the source of the traffic. This can be set to a value between 0 and 7. Frames with a priority of 0 have the lowest priority, and 7 the highest. CFI - (Canonical Format Indicator), this is to provide compatibility with Token Ring networks. For Ethernet this must be set to 0. VLAN ID - enter the identifier of the virtual network Victoria Combo is transmitting frames to, this must be between 0 and 4095.
LLC-1 802.2
LLC Enable (logical Link Control) - switch LLC on or off. This is only available if you have chosen 802.3 LLC1 802.2. DSAP - (destination service access point), Identifier for the service access point (protocol) for which the data carried in the payload is intended. SSAP - (source service access points), Identifier for the service access point (protocol) from which the LLC information field (payload) was initiated. Control - choose from different formats depending on the LLC layer operation mode. This field designates command or response functions and contains a sequence number if required by operation mode used. The value 03 must be selected to emulate the operating mode used in Ethernet networks (Type 1Unacknowledged connectionless-mode. Data transfer without the establishment of a data link level connection). SNAP Enable - (Sub-Network Attachment Point), choose to include the SNAP header in the Ethernet frames. OUI - (Organizational Unique Identifier), enter the unique code for the equipment manufacturer. PID - (Protocol Identifier)
MPLS
MPLS Enable - Multi Protocol Label Switching - enter the label stack entries for the frames.
IP
IP Enable - (Internet Protocol), choose whether the Ethernet frames you want to transmit contain IP information packets.
Payload
Payload - choose Test Setup to set up the payload you want to transmit. For more information see Choosing the Test Setup on page 5-14. Size - enter the size of the payload you want to transmit in Bytes.
5-16
218800
218800-8.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
5
4. If you have chosen IP, choose IP Header to set this up. The following dialog is displayed.
Figure
5.11
Issue 8 - 06/07
IP Header Tx Setup dialog
5-17
218800-8.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
Source IP Address
Enter the IP address of the transmitter in dotted decimal notation, that is aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.
Destination IP Address
Enter the IP address of the receiver in dotted decimal notation, that is aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.
Length
Displays the length of the IP Packets in Bytes. This is automatically calculated from the payload size value selected in the Ethernet dialog (see previous table).
TTL
Time to Live - a the number that is decremented when the packet passes through every network device. When it reaches 0 the packet is discarded.
ToS/Diffserv
Choose Type of Service or Diffserv. Precedence - (only displayed if you choose ToS) choose the priority of the IP packets. See RFC1349 for details. Delay - (only displayed if you choose ToS) choose the level of delay required. Throughput - (only displayed if you choose ToS) choose the type of throughput of frames. Reliability - (only displayed if you choose ToS) choose the reliability level required. DSCP - (Differentiated Services Code Point), (only displayed if you choose Diffserv) enter the binary value for the PHB (Per Hop Behaviour) for the frames transmitted. The default value is 000000. The CU field is currently unused (see RFC 2474 for details).
Protocol
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) or UDP (User Datagram Protocol) Source (only displayed if you choose UDP) choose the UDP port to be used for transmission. Destination (only displayed if you choose UDP) choose the UDP port to be used for receiving frames.
5.3.7
Setting Up Traffic Generation In the Tx Traffic Setup window you can set up the parameters that define the packet traffic transmitted over SDH. You can also start or stop traffic generation (idle packets are transmitted if the generator is OFF). This window also displays values that describe the traffic transmitted currently.
5-18
218800
218800-8.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
5
Follow these steps: 1. To set up the GFP traffic, choose Traffic Generator Setup. OR From the NG 2.5 Setup Summary Home screen, choose Traffic Generator. The following dialog is displayed.
Figure
5.12
Traffic Setup screen
2. To set up traffic generation, choose settings for the following: Frame Rate
Traffic - choose the type of traffic you want to transmit - Constant or Bursty. CIR - enter the Committed Information Rate for the traffic you want to transmit. Frame Size - enter the frame size of the traffic you want to transmit. PIR - enter the Peak Information Rate for the traffic you want to transmit. MBS - enter the Maximum Burst Size or the traffic you want to transmit.
Issue 8 - 06/07
5-19
218800-8.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
3. To start to transmit GFP traffic, choose . If you switch the optical transmitter on without switching on the GFP traffic, SDH or SONET traffic is transmitted, but the GFP information is omitted. When packet generation is switched off, idle GFP packets are transmitted. The following information is displayed on the traffic transmitted by Victoria Combo: Transmitted Frames
Client Data - the number of GFP Client Data frames transmitted by Victoria Combo.
Client Data Bytes - the number bits of GFP Client Data transmitted by Victoria Combo. Client Management - the number of GFP Client Management frames transmitted by Victoria Combo, in frames/second. Traffic Data Bandwidth - the bandwidth being used by the transmission, in bits/second.
Ethernet
Valid Frames - the number of valid Ethernet frames/second transmitted by Victoria Combo. Transmitted Octets - the number of valid Ethernet octets in bits/s transmitted by Victoria Combo. Total Bandwidth - the bandwidth being used by the transmission, in bits/second. Under and Oversized - the number of oversized frames/second transmitted by Victoria Combo. Erroneous FCS - the number of errored Ethernet Frames/second transmitted by Victoria Combo.
5.3.8
Setting Up the Physical Transmitter The settings in the Transmitter (Generator) can be copied to the Receiver (Analyser) and vice-versa. To do this, use the three Coupling buttons at the bottom of the window. The button on the left uncouples the setting of both sections. This way the transmitter is fully independent of the receiver. Switching the Optical Transmitter On To switch the Optical Transmitter ON, touch the button at the top righthand corner of the window. A red LED with an ON status message is displayed. When the optical transmitter is switched off the state message will change to OFF and the LED will be blue.
5-20
218800
218800-8.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup
5
Other options Other options, at lower levels, can be displayed by touching the following buttons in the Transmitter Setup window (you can also display these options through the main menu): •
Background: Program the type of payload transmitted in the background tributaries. Choose Word to type four hexadecimal characters. Select As main. If the information contained in the background tributaries is not important, they will be filled with the same information as the tributary under test programmed in the main Transmitter Setup window.
•
OH Bytes: displays and enables you to program a hexadecimal value for the OH bytes of the tributaries (OH Page Number from 1 to 64) being tested. Columns for HP-POH, RSOH and MSOH bytes are displayed. Some of the OH Bytes are displayed as buttons containing the corresponding label. This means that you can program them using a description. When you enter the description, the hexadecimal value is entered automatically. The OH Number selected is also displayed. The following OH bytes can be programmed using a description:
•
Issue 8 - 06/07
Multiplexer Section Overhead (MSOH/LOH) •
H4: Multiframe Indicator. Since the different members of a contiguous container may be transported over different paths, it is important that information is available for reassembly of the container at the receiving end. The H4 byte carries information on which virtual container the member belongs to and the sequence number of the member.
•
K1 and K2: Automatic Protection Switching Channel Bytes. Program the APS Topology and select a description from the list. Information about the OH Page Number and the hexadecimal value corresponding to the description is displayed.
•
S1: Synchronisation Status Byte. Select the description from the list. The hexadecimal value is displayed with the OH Page Number.
•
Pointer Values: Program the value of AU/STS Path pointers, as well as the value for SS/XX bits with or without NDF in H1 byte.
•
Path Messages: Edit messages to be sent in the J0 and J1 trace bytes to check that they are received correctly. You can enable and disable the J0 byte to carry trace messages, as this byte has a dual role - it can act as a C1 or J0 byte (C1 is a number to identify the AUG in the STM-N frame). To do this touch Enable in Transmitted J0 Path Trace Message. Message Type enables you to choose from 16- or 64-character messages (with and without CRC according to ITU-T G.831) messages. When the type of message is not defined by ITU-T G.707, Non ITU is displayed.
•
TCM N1 and TCM N2: select one to switch on Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) tests if the network under test uses this feature. Make sure that this is not selected if the network does not support TCM.
5-21
218800-8.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup
•
OH BERT: to generate a test pattern in SDH/SONET overheads, choose a C-x structure and select the desired OH bytes by using the Test OH Byte menu. NOTE:Make sure you put the 15 dB optical attenuator in any direct looped connection between the optical transmitter and the optical receiver to prevent damage to the receiver. This window can also be accessed from the NG 2.5 Setup Summary Home screen by choosing Tx in the Setup section.
5.4
Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup The Receiver Setup window is very similar to the Transmitter Setup windows, there are however some differences.
5.4.1
Choosing the Physical Settings The Optical Receiver button enables you to switch the optical receiver on and off. An LED below the button and text displays its status. With the Optical Power Limits button you can configure the receiver so that when an out-of-range optical signal is detected, the detector is switched off. The optical power range can be set in accordance with the ITU recommendations, or you can set it to any other values. The rest of the items in this window are similar to the ones in the Transmitter Setup window.
5-22
•
You can select the receiver Wavelength - between 1310 and 1550 nm. Although the receiver has enough bandwidth to cover both wavelengths, in order to measure the optical power accurately we recommend that you select the one being received.
•
You can display the Path Trace Messages window, where you can enter the message expected so that it can be compared with the messages received.
•
If the SDH signal being received is directly filled with Test sequence (C-x structure selected), you can select the test sequence using this window.
218800
218800-8.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup
5
If the SDH signal being received is filled with GFP frames, you set up the frames using the Rx GFP Setup window. To display this window, choose the GFP Setup button.
Figure
5.13
5.4.2
Receiver Setup screen
Setting up PDH and T-Carrier Victoria Combo’s NG 2.5G module enables you to test native T-Carrier and PDH signals or SDH/SONET mapped T-Carrier and PDH frames. Before you start testing you must set up the receiver. The configuration of the receiver for testing PDH and T-Carrier signals is the same as the configuration of the transmitter. See Setting up PDH and TCarrier on page 5-6.
5.4.3
Setting Up the VCAT The dialog for setting up Virtual Concatenation (VCAT) enables you to choose the type (VC-4, VC-3 and so on), and the number of members within each virtually concatenated group to be analysed by Victoria Combo. You must also select the tributaries within the SDH signal received that are part of each virtually concatenated group, and enter the Sequence Identifier for each one.
Issue 8 - 06/07
5-23
218800-8.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup
1. From the Receiver Setup window, choose VCAT Setup. The following window is displayed:
Figure
5.14
Receiver VCAT Setup screen
2. Choose the Member of the virtually concatenated group you want to analyse. This is the member of the Virtually concatenated group that is analysed by Victoria Combo. The other members are analysed as a group. 3. Enter the Sequence ID number for each of the members of the group. The members of the group are multiplexed and demultiplexed on a byte by byte basis. The sequence number is the order that the member will be processed in. For example, the first byte from the member with sequence number 1, then the first byte from the member with sequence number 2, and so on. The SQ Assignment LED indicates whether the assignment you have entered is correct. 4. Enter the tributaries you want to be members of the virtual concatenation group (Tributary number).The Tributary Assignment The LED indicates whether the tributaries you have entered are correct. The tributary numbers do not need to be the first X available VC-n and they do not need to be contiguous. For example, one possible option is to choose the VC-4s labelled with tributary numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 14, 16 to be members of a particular VC-4-8v. When the multiplexing structure of the members of the VCAT group has two levels, a third column is shown in the Tx VCAT Setup panel. This column shows the coordinates of every member inside the two-level multiplexing structure.
5-24
218800
218800-8.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup
5.4.4
Setting Up the LCAS To set up the Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS), see Setting up the LCAS on page 5-10.
5.4.5
Setting Up the GFP The dialog for programming the Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) settings enables you to set up the GFP frames that will be received by Victoria Combo.
Figure
5.15
Rx GFP Setup screen.
Delineation Algorithm
Delta - in frame delineation Delta+1 is the number of consecutive correct cHECs that must be confirmed to decide that GFP frames are recovered correctly, and SYNC status is achieved. Robustness against false delineation in the re-synchronization process depends on the value of Delta. A value of Delta = 1 is suggested (ITU-T G.7041). SYNC is loss when a frame with cHEC with multiple errors is received.The recommendation is that this should be set to 1.
Single Bit Error Correction
Payload Header - switch single bit error correction on the payload header on or off. By default this should be switched ON. Core Header - switch single bit error correction on the core header on or off. If this is switched on, if a single bit error occurs it is corrected. If multiple bit errors occur the changes from SYNC to HUNT mode. By default this should be switched ON.
Mode
Transport Mode - this always set to Framed.
Core Header
Scrambling - switch core header scrambling on or off. The ITU recommend that this should be ON by default.
GFP Autodetection
Displays a window that enables you to set up GFP Autodetection.
Payload Header
Scrambling - switch payload header scrambling on or off. The ITU recommend that this should be ON by default.
Linear Extension Header
CID - (Channel Identifier), enter the number of the communications channel (between 0 and 255) the traffic will be received on.
For GFP autodetection, see GFP Autodetection on page 5-46. Issue 8 - 06/07
5-25
218800-8.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup
5.4.6
Choosing the Rx Ethernet Settings The Rx Ethernet Setup window enables you to set up a filter of traffic. The results of this filter are displayed in the Rx Eth Flow Filtered window (see Ethernet Flow Filtered on page 5-35).
Figure
5.16
Receiver Ethernet Filter Setup screen
To set up a filter: 1. To select Ethernet frames of a particular type, choose the Ethernet Frame type from the list. 2. To select only Ethernet frames with a specific Destination or Source MAC Address, enter the MAC address in the boxes. 3. Change all the entries in the Mask fields to FF (binary 1111 1111). 4. To select Ethernet frames that have a MAC address that coincides with part of the destination or source MAC address: •
Enter the address as in step 2.
•
In the Mask destination and source address fields, enter the hexadecimal value of the MAC address, substituting 0s for the parts of the MAC address you do not want to filter on.
For example if you want to select MAC addresses that end with 111x (where x is any value), if you convert this to Hexadecimal, it becomes 00:00:00:00:00:0E. 5. To select Ethernet frames that have a specific Ether Type, enter the value you want to filter on, and the decimal value of the Mask you want to use. Here 0 is a value you do not want to filter on and 1 is a value you want to filter on.
5-26
218800
218800-8.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup
5
6. If you want to filter on values in the VLAN tag, enter the value you want to filter on (Priority, CFI, or VLAN ID) and the decimal value of the Mask you want to use. Again, 0 is a value you do not want to filter on and 1 is a value you want to filter on. For example, if you enter Priority 6 (binary 110) and Mask 1, (binary value 001), this means that frames with a VLAN tag that have 0 in the third bit will be selected. That is VLAN tags with values 0, 2, 4, and 6 (binary 000, 010, 100, and 110). If you want to filter on the IP layer, choose IP and set up the masks. This window enables you to enter the masks for the source and destination IP address in decimal notation.
Figure
5.17
Issue 8 - 06/07
Receiver Ethernet Filter Setup screen
5-27
218800-8.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Inserting Events
5.5
Inserting Events The Insertion menu items enable you to insert a wide range of events into the transmitted signal and analyse the effects on the devices under test. You can insert:
5.5.1
•
Alarms
•
Errors
•
Pointer Sequences
•
ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequences
Alarm Insertion To set up alarm insertion: 1. Display the Insertion menu. 2. Choose Alarm Insertion, then choose Open. The Alarm Insertion window is displayed.
Figure
5.18
Alarm insertion screen.
To set up the way alarms are inserted: 1. Choose the way you want to insert alarms:
5-28
•
Off: alarm insertion is disabled
•
Continuous: the alarm condition is inserted permanently
•
M single: a burst of M frames with the alarm condition is inserted
218800
218800-8.book Page 29 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Inserting Events
•
5
M/N Repetitive: a total of N frames are transmitted in a repeated pattern. M frames with the alarm condition are transmitted followed by N-M frames without the alarm condition. M must be more than 1, equal to or less than 31 and less than or equal to the value of N. N must be between 1 and 232 and an even number.
2. Select the Type of Alarm you want to insert from Line, SDH/SONET, VCAT, GFP, PDH, TCAR or Pattern. 3. Choose the VCAT member where you want to insert an alarm. 4. If you want to be able to insert the alarm you have programmed using a button on the desktop, choose Controlled by Desktop. If Victoria Combo has more than one module fitted, you can insert events on more than one interface simultaneously (see Global Action on page 11-3).
5.5.2
Error Insertion To set up error insertion: 1. From the Insertion menu, choose Error Insertion, then choose Open. The Error Insertion window is displayed.
Figure
5.19
Error insertion screen.
2. Choose the way you want to insert errors:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
Off: error insertion is disabled
•
Single: a single error is inserted
•
Rate: errors are inserted at a fixed rate - Mx10-n (where M=1.1, 1.0, 0.9; and n=3...9) 5-29
218800-8.book Page 30 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Measurements
•
Burst: a burst of errors is inserted (enter the number of errors)
•
Repetitive Burst: a burst of errors per second (enter the number of errors) is inserted continuously.
3. Select the Type of error you want to insert from Line, SDH/SONET, GFP, Ethernet, PDH, TCAR or Pattern. If you want to be able to insert the error you have programmed using a button on the desktop, choose Controlled by Desktop. If Victoria Combo has more than one module fitted, you can insert events on more than one interface simultaneously (see Global Action on page 11-3).
5.5.3
Inserting Pointer Sequences For information on how to insert pointer sequences, see Inserting Pointer Sequences on page 3-11.
5.5.4
Inserting ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequences For information on how to insert ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequences, see Inseting ITU-T G.783 Pointer Sequences on page 4-13.
5.6
Measurements The Measurements menu enables you to set up the Auto Measurement Timer.
5.6.1
Using the Auto Measurement Timer See Using the Auto Measurement Timer on page 3-12.
5.6.2
Setting up a Macro Measurement See Setting up a Measurement Macro on page 3-13.
5.7
Displaying Instant Results Instant results are results of tests that are not timed. They are test results are displayed on the screen automatically and updated continuously. They do not involve starting or stopping a measurement.
5-30
218800
218800-8.book Page 31 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
5.7.1
LEDs Events that are being detected can first be displayed using the different LED screens and then the number of events displayed on the corresponding Result screens (for more information, see Timed Results on page 5-38). The LEDs may be four colours: •
Green: no anomaly or defect
•
Red: defect (Alarm)
•
Yellow: anomaly (Error)
•
White: The event is not relevant to the present configuration. Hierarchical inhibition (the event is inhibited by another from a higher level) may also mean that an LED is white. Victoria Combo has three types of LED window - Current, History, Summary:
•
Summary mode enables you to see if any event has occurred in Current LEDS window and/or History LEDS window, but without specifying which one it is (to see this information you must display the Current LEDS or History LEDS window). The Reset History button in this window enables you to reset the LEDs in this window and the History LEDs window.
•
History LEDs windows, if an event is detected, the colour of the LED will remain the same until you touch the Reset History button or the tester is switched off.
•
Current LEDs windows, the colour of the LED changes (from yellow to green and vice versa) as the event is detected and is not detected. There are separate LEDs windows for SDH/SONET, PDH and T-Carrier:
•
Three summary LEDs windows: SDH/SONET, PDH and TCAR
•
Three current LEDs windows: SDH/SONET, PDH and TCAR.
•
Three history LEDs windows: SDH/SONET, PDH and TCAR. In the LED windows the LEDs are grouped in rows according to the type of event (Pattern, System etc.) that they give information about. The current condition of the SDH/SONET LEDs is also displayed on the nextg Home screen. To display the Summary or History LEDs, choose the corresponding button on this screen.
Issue 8 - 06/07
5-31
218800-8.book Page 32 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
The following LEDs are unique to the NG 2.5G module: VCG LOA
Loss of Alignment
LOM
Loss of Multiframe
OOM1
Out of Multiframe 1
OOM2
Out of Multiframe 2
SQM
Sequence Number Mismatch
LFD
Loss of Frame Delineation
cH-U
Uncorrectable cHEC error
cH-C
Correctable cHEC error
tH-U
Uncorrectable tHEC error
tH-C
Correctable tHEC error
eH-U
Uncorrectable eHEC error
eH-C
Correctable eHEC error
pFCS
Payload Frame Checksum error
GFP
5-32
218800
218800-8.book Page 33 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
5
Ethernet Align.
Frame alignment errors
Under
Under-sized frames
Over.
Over-sized frames
Fragm
Fragments
FTL
Frames too Long
FCS
Frame Check Sum errors
OOR
Out of range
IR
In Range
Loopb.
Loopback Overflow
Pattern
Issue 8 - 06/07
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
LSS
Loss of Signal Synchronisation
Slip
Occurs a portion of the test sequence is repeated or lost.
TSE
Test Sequence Error
5-33
218800-8.book Page 34 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
5.7.2
Measuring Optical Power For information, see Measuring Optical Power on page 3-17.
5.7.3
Measuring Signal Frequency For information, see Measuring Signal Frequency on page 3-18.
5.7.4
Pointer Values The Pointer Value window enables you to display the AU pointer values programmed, and to transmit AU pointers with specific values. 1. From the Instant Results menu, choose Pointer Value, then choose Open. The Pointer Value window is displayed: •
Received Pointers displays the programmed AU pointer value and the SS/XX unspecified bits that indicate the type of AU/STS-N.
•
In-Range/Out-of-Range indication
•
LED displaying Loss of Pointer (LOP) alarm status.
2. To set the pointer value in the transmitted frame, enter the values in the Transmitted Pointer fields. 3. Choose whether you want to transmit the pointers with or without an NDF.
Figure
5-34
5.20
Pointer Value results
218800
218800-8.book Page 35 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
5.7.5
5
Ethernet Flow Filtered The Rx Eth Flow Filtered window enables you to view information on filtered Ethernet traffic being received by Victoria Combo. The traffic is filtered using the filter set up in the Rx Ethernet Setup window (see GFP Autodetection on page 5-46). If no filter has been set up and applied, the results apply to the whole Ethernet traffic flow.
Figure
5.21
Issue 8 - 06/07
Filtered Ethernet Flow results
5-35
218800-8.book Page 36 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
All the results below apply to filtered Ethernet frames: Frame Size
Histogram - the size distribution (in octets) of Ethernet frames received by the Victoria Combo. Maximum - the size of the largest Ethernet frame received in bytes. Minimum - the size of the smallest Ethernet frame received in bytes.
Frames
Received frames - the total number of frames received, including bad, broadcast and multicast frames. Received octets - the total number of octets of data, including bad frame octets and FCS octets, received from the network. Framing bits are excluded. Data octets - the number of data octets received.
QoS Traffic
Received frames - the number of valid Ethernet frames containing a QoS payload successfully received. Frame Loss - the number of Ethernet frames lost. Errored Frames - the number of frames containing a QoS payload received with FCS and alignment errors. Out of Order - the number of frames containing a QoS payload received in the incorrect order.
QoS Delay
Average - the average time taken for Ethernet frames to travel from the transmitter to the receiver (in µs). Maximum - the maximum time taken for Ethernet frames to travel from the transmitter to the receiver (in µs). Minimum - the minimum time taken for Ethernet frames to travel from the transmitter to the receiver (in µs).
QoS IAT
Average Inter Arrival Time - the average time gap between successive Ethernet frames. Maximum Inter Arrival Time - the maximum time gap between successive filtered Ethernet frames containing a QoS payload (in µs). Minimum - the minimum time gap between two successive filtered Ethernet frames containing a QoS payload (in µs).
5-36
218800
218800-8.book Page 37 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Displaying Instant Results
5.7.6
Rx Bandwidth The Rx Counters window enables you to view information about the total GFP frames being received on a selected CID, and being received in total by Victoria Combo. It also displays information on the Ethernet frames being received by Victoria Combo.
Figure
5.22
Rx Counters Results
The results below are for unfiltered Ethernet traffic: GFP Frames
The number of Control, Client Data and Client Management frames received and the number of Client Data bytes received. Results are displayed for the total number (left-hand column) and the CID number displayed since the receiver was switched on (right-hand column).
Data Bandwidth
The amount of date in bits per second being received in total (left-hand side) or for the CID displayed (righthand side).
Ethernet frames
The number of frames and octets of the types listed received since the receiver was switched on.
Ethernet Traffic
The Ethernet traffic of the type listed being received by Victoria Combo (in bits per second).
Issue 8 - 06/07
5-37
218800-8.book Page 38 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Timed Results
5.8
Timed Results The Timed Results are the results of a group of measurements. All the measurements are made in a single test and the results are displayed in windows accessed from the Timed Results menu. You can choose which module or modules the tests are performed on (see Setting up the Modules Controlled by the Start button on page 11-2), but not which tests are performed. You can start and stop the measurements by touching Start. You can also choose to make a measurement over a pre-defined period (see Running a Timed Test for a defined period on page 11-2) or delay the start of a test to a time you choose (see Starting a Timed Test at a set time on page 11-2). When the measurements have finished, a results file is automatically created, and you can create a report from this results file (see Creating a Report File on page 8-2). If you want to be able to create a report when a measurement has finished, you must choose to create a results file. If you do not, the results will be available from the Timed Results menu, but no results file will be produced and you cannot create a report. See Creating a Results File on page 8-1. To display a Timed Results window: 1. From the main menu, choose the module you are using to test, then Timed Results, and then the type of result you want to display. To start a test immediately: 2. From the main menu choose Modules, then Global Start & Autostart, then Open. The Global Start & Autostart window is displayed. 3. From the list of Registered Modules, choose the module you want to test with. 4. To start a measurement immediately, touch
5-38
.
218800
218800-8.book Page 39 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Timed Results
5.8.1
5
Physical Alarm Results The Alarms Results windows display the number of Seconds with Alarms for the different alarm types. Counters of alarms that are not applicable are greyed. Background count results are calculated by performing a logical OR of all background tributaries.
Figure
5.23
Physical alarm results
The PDH and T-Carrier alarms are not shown in the Physical Alarm Results panel. There are two specific alarm panels for PDH and T-Carrier framings. You can access these panels from the Start Menu by choosing:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
Start, nextg-x, Timed Results, Alarm Results PDH
•
Start, nextg-x, Timed Results, Alarm Results TCAR
5-39
218800-8.book Page 40 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Timed Results
5.8.2
Physical Error Results The Error Results windows display a Count of errors detected, the number of Errored Seconds detected and the error Rate the for the different types of error. Counters of errors that are not applicable are greyed. Background count results are calculated by performing a logical OR of all background tributaries.
Figure
5.24
Physical error results in foreground and background tributaries
The PDH and T-Carrier alarms are not shown in the Physical Alarm Results panel. There are two specific alarm panels for PDH and T-Carrier framings. You can access these panels from the Start Menu by choosing:
5-40
•
Start, nextg-x, Timed Results, Alarm Results PDH
•
Start, nextg-x, Timed Results, Alarm Results TCAR
218800
218800-8.book Page 41 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Timed Results
5.8.3
5
Pointer Event Results This window displays the AU Count of Pointer Events, Errored Seconds and the Rate at which pointer events occur. The events listed are PJE, NDF and INV.
Figure
5.25
Issue 8 - 06/07
Pointer Event results
5-41
218800-8.book Page 42 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Timed Results
5.8.4
LCAS Event Summary The LCAS Event summary window displays the current and history of the LEDs and a table of seconds with alarms corresponding to LCAS source and sink alarms. CRC-Error information is also displayed. To display information about a specific member, select Member and enter the member number.
Figure
5-42
5.26
LCAS Event Summary screen
218800
218800-8.book Page 43 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Timed Results
5.8.5
5
GFP Events Results The Rx Events GFP window enables you to view alarms and errors (totals and foreground CID) received by Victoria Combo.
Figure
5.27
GFP Alarm results
Errors that can be monitored include GFP HEC errors and payload errors. The following information is displayed: number of, rate of, and number of seconds containing correctable (single-bit) and uncorrectable (multi-bit) errors received. The result is displayed for both the CID selected and the total received. cHEC
Core Header Error Checksum
tHEC
Type Header Error Checksum
eHEC
Extension Header Error Checksum
pFCS
Payload Frame Check Sum
Issue 8 - 06/07
5-43
218800-8.book Page 44 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Timed Results
5.8.6
VCAT Alarms and Delay The Rx Alm window enables you to view virtual concatenation alarms received by Victoria Combo.
Figure
5.28
VCAT Alarms and Delay results window
The following alarms for each VC member (as set in Member number) are displayed: LOA
Loss of Alignment
LOM
Loss of Multiframe
OOM1 and OOM2
Out of Multiframe 1 and 2 - alarm for Multi Frame Indicator 1 and alarm for Multi Frame Indicator 2
SQM
Sequence Number Mismatch
5-44
218800
218800-8.book Page 45 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Timed Results
5.8.7
5
Ethernet Error Results The Rx Err Ethernet window enables you to view Ethernet errors received by Victoria Combo.
Figure
5.29
Ethernet Error results
The number of, rate of, and number of seconds containing the Ethernet errors listed below: Alignment
The number of frames with a length of between 64 and 1518 octets received that have a FCS (Frame Check Sequence) or Alignment Error. The frame length excludes framing bits. For detailed information see 30.3.1.1.7 of 802.3-2002 or RFC 1643/RFC 2665 Ethernet-like interface MIB.
Undersize
Frames less than 64 bytes long received with valid CRCs.
Oversize
The number of frames received, including FCS octets but excluding framing bits, that were longer than the maximum permitted frame size but in the correct format. The maximum permitted frame size can vary according to the environment. For example, 1518 in a non-VLAN environment and 1522 or greater in VLAN environments with valid CRCs. For detailed information see 30.3.1.1.25 of 802.3-2002, or RFC 2819
Fragments
Number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long, with FCS or Alignment Errors. For more information see RFC 2819.
FCS
Frames containing Frame Check Sum errors.
Frames Too Long
The number of frames received, including FCS octets but excluding framing bits, that exceed the maximum permitted frame size with FCS and Alignment errors. The maximum permitted frame size can vary according to the environment. For example, 1518 in a non-VLAN environment and 1522 or greater in VLAN and Jumbo frame environments. For more information see RFC1643/RFC2665 Ethernet-like interface.
Out of range
Frames received where the value in the length/type field was invalid, that is the value did not indicate a valid type or length. For more information see IEEE802.3.
In Range
Only available when IEEE802.3 with LLC frames are being received. Frames where the actual length of the frame and value indicated by Length field do not match. For more information see IEEE802.3.
Issue 8 - 06/07
5-45
218800-8.book Page 46 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Functions
5.8.8
Performance Results See:
5.9
•
G.821 Results on page 4-24
•
G.826 Results on page 3-25
•
G.828 Results on page 3-25
•
G.829 Results on page 3-26
•
M.2100 Results on page 4-24
•
M.2101 Results on page 3-26
•
M.2110 on page 4-25
•
M.2120 on page 4-26
Functions This item in the navigation tree includes miscellaneous measurements and tests.
5.9.1
GFP Autodetection If you do not know the GFP configuration of the signal being received by Victoria Combo, GFP Autodetection tests the signal being received. 1. Display the Functions menu for the Nextg module. 2. Choose GFP Autodetection OR From the Rx GFP Setup screen choose GFP Autodetection. The GFP Autodetection screen is displayed. To start GFP autodetection, touch . Autodetection starts. The process takes about 1 minute.
5-46
218800
218800-8.book Page 47 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Functions
When the process has finished, the results are displayed. If GFP is not present in the signal, GFP_NOT_DETECTED is displayed.
Figure
5.30
GFP Autodetection screen
5.9.2
RFC 2544 With the Nextg module it is possible to perform some tests in accordance with RFC 2544. 1. From the Functions menu for the Nextg module, choose RFC 2544 The RFC 2544 screen is displayed. 2. Select the frame sizes to be used in the Frame Size area. The frame sizes are 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280 and 1518 bytes. 3. Choose the tests to perform.
Throughput
Determines the DUT throughput as defined in RFC 1242.
Latency
Determines the latency as defined in RFC 1242.
Loss Rate
Determines the frame loss rate, as defined in RFC 1242, of a DUT throughout the entire range of input data rates and frame sizes.
Issue 8 - 06/07
5-47
218800-8.book Page 48 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
5
Testing with the NG 2.5G Module Functions
4. Enter the parameters for the configured tests. OR Select Fast or Full to choose a set of preconfigured measurement parameters. 5. Touch to start the test. The duration of the test depends on the number of tests selected and the parameters you have chosen for each test. 6. Once the test has finished, open the results report by pressing View.
Figure
5.9.3
5.31
RFC 2544 test screen
Automatic Protection Switching See Automatic Protection Switching on page 3-29.
5.9.4
Round Trip Delay See Measuring Round Trip Delay on page 3-29.
5-48
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module
6.1
6
Introduction The Jitter/Wander module for Victoria Combo is a hardware option of the NG2.5G module. This hardware is a thin 1.5” module that can operate independently or connected to the NG2.5G module. When operating independently, the module can perform jitter/wander measurements on clock signals. When the Jitter/Wander module is used together with the NG2.5G module you can carry out measurements on SDH/SONET, PDH and T-Carrier networks at bit rates up to 2.5 Gbit/s (STM-16/OC-48). JITTER/WANDER MODULE
Clock OUT
Jittered/Wandered Data Signal Generation
Clock OUT
Electrical OUT
Jittered/Wandered Data Signal Generation
Figure
6.1
Issue 8 - 06/07
Clock IN
NEXT GENERATION 2.5G MODULE
Optical
Tx Tx 1310 1550
Jittered/Wandered Data Signal Analysis
JITTER/WANDER MODULE
Clock OUT
Clock IN
E1
Electrical IN
Optical
Clock IN
Rx
Jittered/Wandered Data Signal Analysis
(a) Stand-alone operation. (b) Joint operation together with the NG2.5G module.
6-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Introduction
6.1.1
About Jitter and Wander Jitter stands for short-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their reference positions in time. In other words, it is a phase oscillation with a frequency higher than 10 Hz. Wander means long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their reference positions in time. Wander is the phase error comprised in the frequency band between 0 and 10 Hz of the spectrum of the phase variation.
6.1.2
About Jitter and Wander Measurements Jitter and wander measurements are needed because Network Elements (NE) experience impairments that may affect synchronisation. They result in bit errors, slips, data loss, and frequency variations that can impair transmission quality. Jitter and wander measurements quantify these impairments to keep synchronism within acceptable limits. The Jitter/Wander measurements that you can carry out with this module of Victoria Combo are the following: •
output jitter; see Output Jitter Measurement on page 6-4
•
jitter/wander generation; see Jitter Generation on page 6-8 and Wander Generation on page 6-13
•
combined jitter (mapping and pointer jitter); see Combined Jitter Measurement on page 6-9
•
output wander; see Output Wander Measurement on page 6-11
You can also perform the following functions:
6.1.3
•
jitter/wander tolerance; see Jitter/Wander Tolerance on page 6-16
•
jitter/wander transfer; see Jitter/Wander Transfer on page 6-18
•
MTIE/TDEV testing; see MTIE/TDEV on page 6-20
The Jitter/Wander Module As described in previous chapters, when a module is added to Victoria Combo, a new item is added to the main menu. When you touch this menu item, several new menu items are displayed:
6-2
•
Save configuration
•
Load default configuration
•
Real-time event log - tracks events with timestamp
•
Real-time histogram - tracks events with a real-time graphical histogram 218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module The Jitter/Wander Module Home Screen
6.2
•
Control Panel - See The Jitter/Wander Module Home Screen on page 6-3
•
Functions - miscellaneous tests such as jitter/wander tolerance, jitter/wander transfer and MTIE/TDEV
•
Measurements - including timers and reports
6
The Jitter/Wander Module Home Screen The module Home screen displays information on the status of the Jitter/Wander module, the test that is running or the last test run. This screen can be used as a ‘control panel’ for the test module rather than using the menus. To display the module Home screen:
LEDs; for more information see LEDs on page 4-17
Analyser; See Output Jitter Measurement on page 6-4
Functions; see Jitter/Wander Functions on page 6-15 Figure
6.2
The Jitter-Wander module Home screen
1. Touch the Start button, The main menu is displayed. Issue 8 - 06/07
Generator; see Jitter Generation on page 6-8 and Wander Generation on page 6-13
.
6-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter Generation and Analysis
2. Choose the jw-1 module, and then choose Control panel, The module Control panel screen is displayed.
.
Alternatively, you can access the Jitter/Wander home panel by using the shortcuts on the NG2.5G home panel. To display more details or to change settings, choose one of the buttons on the screen.
6.3
Jitter Generation and Analysis You can carry out the following jitter tests with the Jitter/Wander module of Victoria Combo:
6.3.1
•
output jitter
•
combined jitter
•
jitter generation
Output Jitter Measurement Output jitter measurements are carried out to find out how much jitter is present at an output port of an NE7. Output jitter can be generated by the NE itself (intrinsic jitter) or transferred from an input (data or synchronisation) to the output. Victoria Combo has different filters to analyse jitter according to international standards. To measure output jitter: 1. Connect the signal under test to: •
The clock input of the Jitter/Wander module to carry out the measurement on a pure clock signal.
•
The corresponding electrical or optical input of the NG2.5G module to carry out the measurement on framed SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier signals.
2. To test framed SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier signals, set up the receiver of the NG2.5G module (see Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup on page 5-22). To test a pure clock signal, in the Jitter/Wander module home screen switch the jitter analyser on, if it is not already running. To do this, touch Jitter in the Analyser menu.
7. This jitter is limited by ITU-T Recommendations G.823 and G.825.
6-4
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter Generation and Analysis
6
3. If necessary, touch Range (Ulpp) to set the full scale value for the jitter amplitude, Int (s) to set the integration period, Band to set the lower threshold of the analysis bandwidth8 and Clock Freq to match the frequency of the signal under test. The integration period is the width of the time window in which the peak-to-peak jitter amplitude measurement is performed. See Figure 6.3:
Amplitude (UI)
Time window Jitter modulation
Peak to peak amplitude (UIpp) for t=ti
Time
Integration period Measurement duration
Figure
6.3
Integration period
4. To set up the bandwidth for the jitter measurement in line with the standards, choose Filter HP+LP. The options of this button are related to Recommendations O.172 and O.171, and they take values automatically, depending on the bit rate of the signal analysed (see Figure 6.4 and the following table).
8. Typically, jitter is defined starting from 10 Hz.
Issue 8 - 06/07
6-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter Generation and Analysis
HP1
HP2
LP
HPmms
1.5M
10 Hz
8 kHz
40 kHz
12 kHz
2M
20 Hz
18 kHz
100 kHz
12 kHz
8M
20 Hz
3 kHz
400 kHz
12 kHz
34M
100 Hz
10 kHz
800 kHz
12 kHz
45M
10 Hz
30 kHz
400 kHz
12 kHz
51M
100 Hz
20 kHz
400 kHz
12 kHz
140M
200 Hz
10 kHz
3500 kHz
12 kHz
155M
500 Hz
65 kHz
1.3 MHz
12 kHz
622M
1 kHz
200 kHz
1.3 MHz
12 kHz
2.5G
5 kHz
1 MHz
20 MHz
12 kHz
High pass
Low pass
Wideband Highband RMS band HP1
Figure
6.4
HP2 HPrms
LP
-3 dB cutoff frequencies for measurement filters
To add a high-pass filter with -3 dB cutoff frequency of 2 Hz, disable the 2M HP button and tick the checkbox HP 2 Hz. If you are testing at 2 Mbit/s, use the 2M HP button to select a set of filters specific to this bit rate.
6-6
218800
218800-8.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter Generation and Analysis
You can combine these options with the option LP of the button Filter. HP+LP. Button to switch between Alarm and Amplitude results
Menu to switch the Jitter Analyser on Status of the Jitter Analyser Results panel Hits panel Configuration parameters
Measurement filters
Figure
6.5
Jitter Analyser panel
5. If the Show Amplitude button is displayed in the Analyser menu, touch it to see the numeric results of the output jitter measurement. •
The UIpp field displays the peak-to-peak jitter amplitude value for the configuration values you have selected.
•
The UIppmax field displays the maximum UIpp value since the start of the measurement. You can force-reset UIppmax at any time by touching Reset UIpp max. See Jitter Analyzer Status Messages on page 6-7.
6. To count the number of times the jitter amplitude surpasses a previously programmed threshold value, in Hits Threshold set the threshold value in UI (Unitary Intervals). The count of hits is displayed in the Count field in the HITS panel. The Seconds field displays the time the UIpp value has been above the threshold. Jitter Analyzer Status Messages The messages shown at the Status field are the following:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
Locked: The Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) of the analyser is locked, and the jitter measurement is valid.
•
Unlocked: The clock is detected, but the demodulation circuit is not locked, either due to a frequency offset between the received and the programmed clock, or because of an excessive jitter amplitude for the full-scale value.
6-7
218800-8.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter Generation and Analysis
6.3.2
•
No clock: There is no input clock signal, or the frequency of the input clock signal is out of range.
•
Capturing: A whole integration period has not passed since the start of the measurement, so the measurement values are not valid yet. (This status appears for the Int values 10 s and 60 s.)
Jitter Generation To generate jitter in Victoria Combo: 1. Connect Victoria Combo to the device or network under test. •
for a jittered clock signal, connect the clock output of the Jitter/Wander module
•
for framed SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier jittered signals, connect the corresponding electrical or optical output of the NG2.5G module
2. To generate framed SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier signals, set up the transmitter of the NG2.5G module (see Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup on page 5-5). 3. To generate a pure clock signal, in the Jitter/Wander module home screen switch the jitter generator on, if it is not running already. To do this, touch Jitter in the Generator menu. 4. Touch Clock Ref. to select the synchronisation source for the generated signal. You have the following options: •
Victoria Combo’s internal clock
•
a clock recovered from a signal received in an electrical or optical input of the NG2.5G module
•
an external reference clock obtained from the Ref IN input of the front module
5. To set the nominal clock frequency for the test signal, configure the Clock Freq menu. Add a line offset (in ppm) to the generated signal by configuring Offset in the Generator menu. You have the following options: •
0: sets the clock frequency to the nominal value
•
+ITU, -ITU: sets the offset to the maximum values allowed by the corresponding ITU-T recommendations
•
+Usr, -Usr: sets the offset to a value configured by the user in ppm
6. To select the jitter modulation signal, touch Modulation. You can choose between:
6-8
•
Off: to disable the jitter generator
•
Sinusoidal: for sinusoidal modulation
218800
218800-8.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter Generation and Analysis
7. To modify the amplitude and frequency values of a jitter modulation signal, enter the desired values for Amplitude and Frequency. Button to set the input clock reference
Menu to switch the Jitter Generator on Configuration parameters
Figure
6.6
6.3.3
Jitter Generator panel
Combined Jitter Measurement Mapping jitter is always present in SDH/SONET signals, so, when pointer movements occur, this jitter is added to the pointer jitter. Pointer and mapping jitter effects together are known as combined jitter9. To measure combined jitter: 1. Connect the corresponding electrical or optical output of the NG2.5G module to the SDH or SONET input interface of the device or network under test. 2. Connect a PDH or T-Carrier output of the device or network under test to the corresponding electrical input of the NG2.5G module. 3. Set up the transmitter of the NG2.5G module for SDH or SONET signal generation (see Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup on page 5-5). 4. Set up the receiver of the NG2.5G module for analysis of PDH or T-Carrier signals Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup on page 5-22. 5. Set up G.783 pointer sequence generation (see Inserting Pointer Sequences on page 5-30). 6. Measure the output jitter in the tributary signal (see Output Jitter Measurement on page 6-4).
6.3.4
Jitter Modulation Output Victoria Combo has an analog output interface, where the outgoing signal is the jitter (or wander) modulation of the signal analysed. The outgoing signal is always present at the output interface, so no previous setup is needed.
9. They are measured together, because mapping jitter cannot be measured separately.
Issue 8 - 06/07
6-9
218800-8.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter Generation and Analysis
The analog output makes it possible to carry out measurements on the jitter modulating signal by using an external instrument (an oscilloscope or a spectrum analyzer). The relationship between the jitter amplitude and the voltage delivered to the output is independent of the hierarchy. See the following table: Range
6.3.5
Output: load 75 Ohm
Output: high Z
1 UIpp
1 UIpp/V
0.5 UIpp/V
10 UIpp
10 UIpp/V
5 UIpp/V
100 UIpp
100 UIpp/V
50 UIpp/V
1000 UIpp
1000 UIpp/V
500 UIpp/V
Jitter Alarms and LEDs Jitter alarms are a specific case of timed results. This means that you must start a measurement by pressing the module Start button or the general Start button to start counting events. To get information about jitter alarms, touch Show Alarms in the jitter analyser. The tester will record and show the number of seconds the following alarms have been active: LOC
Loss of Clock There is no signal in the Clock Input interface of the Jitter/Wander module
LTI
Loss of Timing Information The External reference from the Ref IN interface of the front module is not detected.
PMSt
Phase Measurement Status The measurement PLL is not locked with the signal under test.
The LEDs are a specific case of instant results. The following LEDs are unique to the Jitter/Wander module:
6-10
LOC
Loss of Clock There is no signal in the Clock Input interface of the Jitter/Wander module
PMSt
Phase Measurement Status The measurement PLL is not locked with the signal under test.
Hits
Hits The jitter amplitude is above the HITS threshold.
218800
218800-8.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Wander Generation and Analysis
For more information about LEDs, see LEDs on page 5-31.
To switch between history LEDs and current LEDs
LEDs panel
Jitter alarms
Figure
6.4
6.7
Seconds with alarm
LEDs and Alarm panels
Wander Generation and Analysis You can carry out the following wander tests with the Jitter/Wander module of Victoria Combo:
6.4.1
•
output wander
•
wander generation
Output Wander Measurement To carry out an output wander measurement: 1. Connect the signal under test to: •
the clock input of the Jitter/Wander module to carry out the measurement on a pure clock signal
•
the corresponding electrical or optical input of the NG2.5G module to carry out the measurement on framed SDH, SONET, PDH or TCarrier signals
2. Connect the reference clock signal to the Ref IN input of the front module. 3. Configure the receiver of the NG2.5G module to analyse framed SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier signals (see Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup on page 5-22). To test a pure clock signal, in the Jitter/Wander home screen switch the wander analyser on, if it is not already running. To do this, choose Wander in the Analyser menu.
Issue 8 - 06/07
6-11
218800-8.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Wander Generation and Analysis
4. To set the full-scale value for wander amplitude (in microseconds), select TIE range, and select Clock Freq to match the frequency of the signal under test. 5. Touch Clock Ref. in the Generator panel to select the synchronisation source for the generated signal. You can choose between the following options: •
Victoria Combo’s internal clock
•
a clock recovered from a signal received in an electrical / optical input of the NG2.5G module
•
an external reference clock obtained from the Ref IN input (front module)
Normally, wander measurements are performed with the help of an external synchronization reference connected to the Ref IN input or a signal input of Victoria Combo. To use these signals, you must choose an external or recovered clock. 6. If the Show Results button is displayed in the Analyser panel, press the Show Results button to see numeric results of the output wander measurement. The TIE field displays the time interval error between the signal under test and the reference signal in nanoseconds from the moment the measurement was started, or the value to which it was resetted last time. With the TIE measurement you can calculate:
6-12
•
the maximum and current frequency Offset values (in ppm) of the received signal with respect to its nominal value
•
the maximum and current frequency Drift values (in ppm/s) of the received signal (this is the time derivative of the frequency offset)
218800
218800-8.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Wander Generation and Analysis
You can manually set the TIE value to zero by pressing Reset TIE. To manually reset the offset and drift values, press Reset Max. Button to switch between Alarm and Amplitude results
Menu to switch the Wander Analyser on Status of the Wander Analyser Results panel
Button to reset the Maximum and TIE results Configuration parameters
Figure
6.8
Wander Analyser panel
Wander Analyser Status Messages The messages shown at the Status field are the following:
6.4.2
•
No clock: There is no input clock signal.
•
Overflow: The clock of the signal received has an excessive wander level (TIE) for the full-scale value selected, or frequency offset is producing a ramp-shaped TIE that has overflown the wander analyser.
•
Stopped: The MTIE/TDEV measurement is stopped.
•
Running: The MTIE/TDEV measurement is under way.
Wander Generation The aim of wander generation is to check the behaviour of NEs or networks when a previously selected, programmable wander modulation is present. To generate wander: 1. Connect to the device or network under test:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
the clock output of the Jitter/Wander module, to get a wandered clock signal
•
the corresponding electrical or optical output of the NG2.5G module, to get framed SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier wandered signals
6-13
218800-8.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Wander Generation and Analysis
2. Connect the reference clock signal to the Ref IN input of the front module. 3. To generate framed SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier signals set up the transmitter of the NG2.5G module (see Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup on page 5-5). To analyse a pure clock signal, in the Jitter/Wander module home screen select the synchronisation source for the generated signal. To do this, touch Clock Ref. You can choose between the following options: •
Victoria Combo’s internal clock
•
a clock recovered from a signal received in an electrical / optical input of the NG2.5G module
•
an external reference clock obtained from the Ref IN input of the front module
Normally, wander measurements are performed with the help of an external synchronization reference connected to the Ref IN input or a signal input of Victoria Combo. To use these signals, you must choose external or recovered clock.
Button to set the input clock reference
Menu to switch the Wander Generator on
Configuration parameters
Figure
6.9
Wander Generator panel
4. If necessary, set the nominal clock frequency for the test signal by configuring the Clock Freq menu. Add a line offset in ppm to the generated signal by configuring the Offset menu in the Generator menu. You can choose between: •
0: sets the clock frequency to the nominal value
•
+ITU, -ITU: sets the offset to the maximum allowed values in line with the corresponding ITU-T recommendations
•
+Usr, -Usr: sets the offset to a value configured by the user in ppm
5. Touch Modulation to select the wander modulation signal You can choose between:
6-14
•
Off: to disable the jitter generator
•
Sinus.: for sinusoidal modulation
218800
218800-8.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter/Wander Functions
6
6. To modify the amplitude and frequency values of a wander modulation signal, enter the desired values for Amplitude and Frequency. Set the measurement unit for the amplitude by using the menu next to Amplitude. These values can only be configured if the modulation signal is sinusoidal.
6.4.1
Wander Alarms and LEDs See Jitter Alarms and LEDs on page 6-10.
6.4.2
Wander Modulation Output Victoria Combo has an analog output interface, where the outgoing signal is the wander (or jitter) modulation of the signal analysed. This outgoing signal is always present at the output interface, so no previous setup is needed. The analog output makes it possible to carry out measurements on the wander modulating signal by means of external instruments (oscilloscopes or spectrum analyzers). The relationship between the wander amplitude and the voltage delivered to the output is independent of the hierarchy. See the table below.
6.5
Range
Output: load 75 Ohm
Output load: High Z
1 µs
1.358 µs/V
0.679 µs/V
10 µs
10.85 µs/V
5.429 µs/V
100 µs
86.88 µs/V
43.44 µs/V
1 ms
1.390 ms/V
0.695 ms/V
10 ms
11.12 ms/V
5.561 ms/V
100 ms
89.00 ms/V
44.50 ms/V
1s
1.424 s/V
0.712 s/V
10 s
11.38 s/V
5.693 s/V
Jitter/Wander Functions Victoria Combo enables you to carry out a set of automatic measurements called functions. When a function is running, the tester will not perform any other measurement until the function has finished. For more information, see Performing Functions on page 3-27.
Issue 8 - 06/07
6-15
218800-8.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter/Wander Functions
6.5.1
Jitter/Wander Tolerance Victoria Combo uses the onset of errors to perform automatic tolerance measurements10. The type of NE determines at which interface the errored seconds are counted: •
regenerator: the output interface corresponding to the jittered input
•
multiplexer: the channel in the aggregate signal corresponding to the jittered tributary signal input
•
demultiplexer: any of the tributary signal output interfaces To carry out a jitter/wander tolerance measurement:
1. Connect the correct electrical or optical output of the NG2.5G module to the SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier input interface of the device under test. 2. Connect an SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier output of the device or network under test to the corresponding electrical or optical input of the NG2.5G module. 3. Configure the transmitter (see Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup on page 5-5) and the receiver (see Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup on page 5-22). •
To test a multiplexer or an ADM, set the bit rate of the transmitter to a lower value than the bit rate of the receiver.
•
To test a regenerator or a crossconnect, set the bit rate of the transmitter to the same value as the bit rate of the receiver.
•
To test a demultiplexer or an ADM, set the bit rate of the transmitter to a higher value than the bit rate of the receiver.
4. Go to the Jitter/Wander module home panel OR in the Start menu, choose jw-x, Functions and then JW Functions. 5. In Jitter/Wander Functions, choose Tolerance Function. 6. Touch Settings to open the configuration panel for this function. 7. Touch Error Source to select the type of error to detect at the DUT output.
10. The amplitude of jitter modulation is increased at the input of the DUT until the output signal degradation surpasses a previously defined threshold. The procedure has to be repeated for several modulation frequencies; the range needed to compare to the measurement tolerance mask.(ITU-T O.171 defines 2 errored seconds in a period of 30 seconds).
6-16
218800
218800-8.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter/Wander Functions
8. Touch Gate (s) to set up the gate time. This defines the interval in which a jitter amplitude value is present at a given frequency, according to the onset of errors (this is 30 s according to ITU-T O.171). 9. Touch Setting time (s) to configure a setup time. This is the waiting period before the DUT is stabilised, and the measurement result is valid for a given jitter amplitude-frequency combination. The setup time has to be higher or equal to the gate time. 10.If you want to perform a pass/fail test only, select Fast Tolerance. 11.Set up the values to be tested and their pass/fail thresholds by entering them in the mask table. •
Use the Load Mask button to load the stored values for the mask.
•
Use the Save Mask button to save the current values of the mask.
To switch between the configuration panels for the different functions Quick Pass/Fail test Measurement frequencies and threshold values
Time periods to be configured Errors to be taken into account for the results
Mask selector To manage tolerance mask files
Figure
6.10
Setup panel for the tolerance function
NOTE: Before a software upgrade we recommend that you copy the user-defined mask files into an external memory device. See the Transferring Files from Victoria Combo to a Computer using a Compact Flash Device on page 9-6.
Issue 8 - 06/07
6-17
218800-8.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter/Wander Functions
12.Close the settings panel and press in JW Functions to start the measurement. The measurement starts and the results are traced in real time.
6.5.2
•
To switch between graphical and textual results, touch
•
To open a larger results panel, touch Full Screen.
.
Jitter/Wander Transfer To measure jitter/wander transfer: 1. Connect the corresponding electrical or optical output of the NG2.5G module to the SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier input interface of the device under test. 2. Connect an SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier output of the device or network under test to the corresponding electrical or optical input of the NG2.5G module. 3. Configure the transmitter (see Setting up the Module - Transmitter Setup on page 5-5) and receiver (see Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup on page 5-22). •
To test a multiplexer or an ADM, set the bit rate of the transmitter to a lower value than the bit rate of the receiver.
•
To test a regenerator or a crossconnect, set the bit rate of the transmitter to the same value as the bit rate of the receiver.
•
To test demultiplexer or an ADM, set the bit rate of the transmitter to a higher value than the bit rate of the receiver.
4. Go to the Jitter/Wander module home screen OR in the Start menu, choose jw-x, then Functions and then JW Functions. 5. In Jitter/Wander Functions, choose Transfer Function. 6. Press Settings in Jitter/Wander Functions to open the configuration panel for this function. 7. Program the Setting Time (s). This is the waiting period before the DUT is stabilised, and the measurement result is valid for a given jitter amplitude-frequency combination. 8. Select Input Signal to choose between Default and Tol. Res. If you touch Tol. Res., the Load Tolerance File button appears.
6-18
•
Press Load Tolerance File to use the results of a previous jitter / wander tolerance measurement as a stimulus for the current measurement.
•
Choose the tolerance file you want to use.
218800
218800-8.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter/Wander Functions
9. In the mask table, enter the values to be tested and their pass/fail thresholds. •
Use the Load Mask button to load the stored values for the mask.
•
Use the Save Mask button to save the current values of the mask.
NOTE: Before a software upgrade we recommend that you copy the user-defined mask files into an external memory device. See the Transferring Files from Victoria Combo to a Computer using a Compact Flash Device on page 9-6.
To switch between the configuration panels for the different functions Time period to be configured Measurement frequencies and threshold values
Mask selector Load previous tolerance results as a stimulus
To manage transfer mask files
Figure
6.11
Jitter transfer settings
10.Close the settings screen and touch to start the measurement. The measurement starts and the results are traced in real time.
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
To switch between graphical and textual results, touch
•
To open a larger results panel, touch Full Screen.
.
6-19
218800-8.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter/Wander Functions
Figure
6.12
6.5.3
Graphical results for Jitter/Wander transfer
MTIE/TDEV To carry out MTIE (Maximum Time Interval Error) and TDEV (Time Deviation) measurements: 1. Connect the test signal to: •
the clock input of the Jitter/Wander module to carry out the measurement on a pure clock signal
•
the corresponding electrical or optical input of the NG2.5G module to carry out the measurement on framed SDH, SONET, PDH or TCarrier signals
2. Connect the reference clock signal to the Ref IN input of the front module. 3. To analyse framed SDH, SONET, PDH or T-Carrier signals, configure the receiver of the NG2.5G module (see Setting Up the Module - Receiver Setup on page 5-22). To analyse a pure clock signal, in the Jitter/Wander module home screen OR in the JW Functions panel, choose jw-x, then Functions and then JW Functions. 4. In Jitter/Wander Functions, choose MTIE/TDEV Functions. 5. Touch Settings in Jitter/Wander Functions to open the configuration panel.
6-20
218800
218800-8.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter/Wander Functions
6. In Settings, choose MTIE. •
Select MRTIE if there is a known frequency offset between the reference signal and the signal under test. In this case you have to enter the MRTIE frequency offset in ppm.
•
Choose the Max. Obs. Time (s) for the MTIE measurement. This is the maximum value of the observation time that defines the MTIE parameter.
•
Set up the values to be tested and their pass/fail thresholds by entering them in the mask table. Load or save masks by touching Load Mask or Save Mask.
7. In Settings, choose TDEV. Choose the Max. Obs. Time (s) for the MTIE measurement. This is the maximum value of the observation time that defines the MTIE. •
Set up the values to be tested and their pass/fail thresholds by entering them in the mask table.
•
Load or save masks with the Load Mask and Save Mask buttons. To switch between the configuration panels for the different functions
MRTIE setup
Observation time
Measurement frequencies and thresholds
To manage MTIE/TDEV mask files Figure
6.13
MTIE and TDEV settings
8. Close the settings panel and touch to start the measurement. The measurement starts and the results are traced in real time.
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
To switch between the MTIE and TDEV result views, touch Show MTIE or Show TDEV.
•
To switch between a graphical and textual results, touch
•
To open a larger results panel, touch Full Screen.
.
6-21
218800-8.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
6
Testing with the Jitter/Wander Module Jitter/Wander Functions
Figure
6.14
6.5.4
Graphical results for MTIE/TDEV
MTIE and TDEV-Based Wander Tolerance Measurement You can also perform an MTIE/TDEV-based tolerance measurement. This is useful when you have to test the SSU/SASE-BITS clock or the SEC clock performance. To perform this measurement, you must feed the wander generator of Victoria Combo with the wander modulating signal corresponding to the predefined MTIE/TDEV masks. See Wander Generation on page 6-13 for more information on how to generate wander. Once the modulation signal is loaded to Victoria Combo, enable the wander generator and check the DUT for proper operation.
6-22
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Tracing Events
7.1
7
Introduction The Trace viewer enables you to display the results of a measurement in an intuitive, graphical way. Post and pre-filtering functions enable you to display selected results or the complete set of all possible anomalies and defects detected in the signal being analysed. Both time plots and bar graphs may be displayed.
7.2
Displaying the Trace Viewer 1. Display the main menu. 2. Choose Measurements. Two options are displayed:
7.3
•
Configuration enables you to choose which module you want to trace the events from and which events to trace.
•
Histogram & Reports displays the available measurement results, and permits to choose the measurement you want to display as a trace. When you touch Histogram, the measurement is displayed in the Trace window.
Choosing the Events you want to Trace The Measurements Configuration window enables you to choose both the Victoria Combo module/s and the events to trace of each module: 1. In the Measurements Configuration window, choose in the Enable Modules for Results list, the module/s of which events you want to trace.
Issue 8 - 06/07
7-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
7
Tracing Events The Trace Viewer Window
2. Choose the events you want to trace from the Trace Event selection list. Only the selected events will be traced.
Figure
7.1
Pre-filtering window
•
Check the Enable serial dump checkbox to print the event results through the serial port in real-time.n To choose the file you want to view as a trace:
1. From the main menu, choose Measurements, then choose Histograms & Reports. The Histograms & Reports window is displayed. 2. From the Available Measurements list, choose the report you want to display. 3. Choose Histogram. The Trace window is displayed.
7.4
The Trace Viewer Window The Trace viewer window is useful because it displays: •
a large amount of data in a compact way; at a glance you can see the events detected during a measurement.
•
the distribution of the events detected through time, indicating when the anomalies (errors) and defects (alarms) are concentrated; this is very useful for identifying a burst of errors. There are three ways of displaying the detected events:
1. Time plot - displays an ON/OFF condition and is applied to alarms. There are three states: - Inhibit (white): this means that another event is inhibiting the analysis of the current event (for example, Loss Of Signal, LOS, inhibits any other analysis) - OFF (green): the defect is not present
7-2
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Tracing Events Arrangement and Functions
7
- ON (red): the defect is present
2. Histogram - displays bars quantifying anomalies (errors or slips); the background is pale blue and the histogram bars appear in dark blue on this background. 3. Linear display - lines are plotted on a white background and quantify some parameters also traced by Victoria Combo, like the frequency value (Hz) or the pointer value. If the traced value is out-of-range, this is displayed at the top or bottom of every time-plot cell using a red segment.
7.5
Arrangement and Functions The Trace window has three main parts: •
Trace Event selection (Post-filtering)
•
Trace section
•
Control section You can filter the events displayed after they have been traced in a similar way to selecting the events to be traced before they were traced. This enables you to concentrate on the events you are interested in without losing any information.
1. From the Measurements menu, choose Views. The Views window is displayed. 2. From the Available measurements list, choose the measurement you want to display as a trace. 3. Touch Trace. The Trace window is displayed. 4. Choose the events you want to display from the Trace Event selection list (see figure 7.2).
Issue 8 - 06/07
7-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
7
Tracing Events Arrangement and Functions
Expand/Contract Control Unselected event
Selected event
Touch here to select
Level (type) of event (in this case SDH higher-order path)
Scroll bar
Figure
7.2
Post-filtering is done by using Trace Event selection
The Trace section is made up of a set of rows, each row corresponding to a traced event. A row contains a series of consecutive cells. The width of a cell corresponds to the time resolution (seconds, hours, days) programmed in the Control section. See figure 7.3. Count of B2 errors corresponding to the selected time cell (height of the histogram bar) Time cell (1s, 1m or 1h)
Histogram bars
Row
Event (B2 errors)
Figure
7.3
Selected time cell (cursor on this cell)
Row of the Trace viewer
Note that if a row contains a defect (alarm), the information is given by the colour of the cells (green, red, white) and the number of seconds with the alarm associated with the selected cell (place the cursor on the cell).
7-4
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Tracing Events Arrangement and Functions
7
If the row is associated with a variable parameter like the pointer value (for example AU-PTR), the linear plot across the cell displays a value in the middle of the time cell. This is the value displayed at the right of the row when the time cell is selected. The control section is the area at the bottom of the Trace window (see figure 7.4). In this section you have the following control buttons: •
Time-Scale (Resolution) controls
•
Controls to move the cursor along the time axis (the cursor can be moved directly by using the pointer or mouse on the button
•
Event Search controls
•
Zoom tool
Histogram
Time Plot
Blue colour indicates the event to be searched
No. of errors (counter) or No. of seconds with alarm or numerical values (e.g. frequency or pointer)
Post-Filtering
Time-Scale (Resolution)
Figure
7.4
Issue 8 - 06/07
Fast Backward
Backward
Current position of the cursor
Cursor Forward
Event Search Keys
Zoom
Trace Viewer window
7-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
7 7.6
Tracing Events Real-time histogram
Real-time histogram The Real-time histogram is a powerful tool for displaying in real-time all the events chosen by the user during a measurement in the same way that the Trace window. 1. From each module menu, choose Real-time histogram...The Trace window is displayed. 2. Start a measurement and choose the events to be displayed.
7.7
Real-time event log The Real-time event log is an easy way to trace the events during a measurment in text-mode. 1. From each module menu, choose Real-time event log...The Real-time event log window is displayed. 2. Check Track changes to display the events automatically. 3. Start a measurement.
Figure
7.5
Real-time event log window
•
7-6
See the figure 7.1 to know how to enable the serial dump.
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Generating a Report
8
When you perform a Timed Test (see Timed Results on page 3-23, Timed Results on page 4-22 and Timed Results on page 5-38) a results file (.res) is generated. The Measurements option on the main menu enables you to create a report file (.rpt) that can be viewed on screen, saved to a memory device, transferred to a computer or printed (see Using Files on page 9-1). Before you start a timed test, you must choose to create a results file. If you do not, the results will be available from the Timed Results menu, but no results file will be produced and you cannot create a report.
8.1
Creating a Results File 1. From the main menu, choose Measurements, then choose Configuration. The Measurement Config window is displayed. OR From the tester Home screen, choose Result storage filter. 2. From the list, choose the module or modules you want to create results files for. When the Timed test has finished, a results file is created for each module.
Issue 8 - 06/07
8-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
8
Generating a Report Creating a Report File
8.2
Creating a Report File 1. From the main menu, choose Measurements, then choose Histograms & Reports. OR Choose Histograms and report generation from the Home screen. The Histograms & Reports window is displayed.
Figure
8.1
The Histograms and Reports screen
2. From the Available measurements list, choose the results file you want to generate a report for. Information is displayed in the window to help you find the correct file. 3. Choose the Report type you want to generate. 4. Enter a File name. 5. If you want to, enter a Description for the report file. 6. To start report generation touch Generate report. The report is displayed on screen (See Figure 8.2). 7. If you want to print the report, make sure that the printer is connected and touch Print.
8-2
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Generating a Report Creating a Report File
Figure
8.2
Issue 8 - 06/07
8
Report viewer screen
8-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
8
8-4
Generating a Report Creating a Report File
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Using Files
9
By using the Files menu you can manage the files stored on your Victoria Combo or the storage devices attached to it. To display the Screenshots, Configurations, Reports or Measures windows: 1. From the main menu choose Files. 2. Choose the type of file you want to work with. The corresponding window is displayed. There are four types of files that you can work with in Victoria Combo:
9.1
•
Screenshot files (.jpg)
•
Configuration files (.cfg)
•
Report files (.rpt)
•
Measurement results files (.res)
The File Manager Windows The different types of files are displayed in similar windows. The files can be saved in internal memory or onto a removable memory device installed in Victoria Combo. The file manager window displays: •
A list of the files of the type you have selected and their File name, date of Creation, Location (Slot 1, Slot 2, Internal), whether they are protected (Prot.) and their Size. The format of the date and time changes depending on the current application that is running (SDH or SONET). See Introduction to Victoria Combo Modules on page 11-1.
•
Information about the state of the memory in Free Storage. If there is not enough memory to save a file, Victoria Combo displays a warning indicating that some files must be deleted or, if a microdrive or memory card is installed that some result files may be moved.
•
You can also enter a file Description if you want to save a more detailed description of the file contents. NOTE:For files on an external memory device to be visible in file manager windows, they must be saved in folders called: configurations, reports, results and screenshots. You must create these folders using a PC before inserting the device into the Victoria Combo.
Issue 8 - 06/07
9-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
9
Using Files Working with Files
9.2
Working with Files The buttons in the file manager window enable you to:
9.2.1
•
Change the properties of a file (Props.) that is rename the file or edit the file description
•
Delete: delete files selected
•
Protect: protect files against accidental deletion
•
Move: move files to a different location (Slot 1, Slot 2 or Internal memory)
•
Copy: copy files from the current location to another location
•
Print: print a report file using a printer connected to the RS-232 connector
•
View: the contents of results and reports files
•
Load: load a configuration file, Victoria Combo is set up as saved in the configuration file
Changing the Properties of a File The Props. button in the file manager window enables you to rename a file or edit the description of a file: 1. In the Contents list choose the file you want to work on. 2. Touch Props. The Edit properties window is displayed. You cannot change the properties of a file if it is protected, you must change protection to No first. 3. Touch the field you want to edit - New name, Without extension or Description. 4. Touch . The keyboard is displayed. 5. Use the keyboard to edit the text. 6. Touch OK to save the changes.
9.2.2
Deleting Files You cannot delete a file if it is protected, you must change protection status to No first. 1. Select the file or files you want to delete by touching them in the Contents list. To deselect a file, touch it again. 2. Touch Delete.
9-2
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Using Files Working with Files
9
3. In the Delete files window, touch Yes. The files you selected are deleted.
9.2.3
Protecting Files Protecting files makes it more difficult to delete them accidentally. 1. Select the file or files you want to protect by touching them in the Contents list. To de-select a file, touch it again. 2. Touch Protect. The Prot. status changes from No to Yes in the Contents list. To change the files’ status, touch Protect again.
9.2.4
Moving Files to another Location You can move files from the internal memory of Victoria Combo to another memory device installed in Victoria Combo (flash digital memory cards or flash memory microdrives). You cannot move a file if it is protected, you must change the protection status to No first. 1. Select the file or files you want to move by touching them in the Contents list. To deselect a file, touch it again. 2. Touch Move. The Select destination window is displayed. 3. Choose where you want to move the file to. 4. Touch OK. The file is moved.
9.2.5
Copying Files to another Location You can copy files from the internal memory of Victoria Combo to another memory device installed in Victoria Combo (flash digital memory cards or flash memory microdrives) 1. Select the file or files you want to copy by touching them in the Contents list. To de-select a file, touch it again. 2. Touch Copy. 3. Choose where you want to copy the file to. 4. Touch OK. The file is copied.
Issue 8 - 06/07
9-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
9
Using Files Working with Files
9.2.6
Printing a File Victoria Combo enables you to print a report or measurement result file using a printer connected to the RS-232 connector. To print a file: 1. Connect the printer to Victoria Combo. 2. Switch the printer on. 3. Select the report or results file you want to print by touching it in the Contents list. You can only print one file at a time. To deselect a file, touch it again. 4. Touch Print. The file is printed.
9.2.7
Viewing a File Victoria Combo enables you to view the contents of a report file on screen. 1. Select the report file you want to view by touching it in the Contents list. To deselect a file, touch it again. You can only view one file at a time. 2. Touch View. The file’s contents are displayed in a separate window. Alternatively you can do the following: 1. From the tester Home screen, choose View generated reports. 2. Select the report file you want to view by touching it in the Contents list. To deselect a file, touch it again. You can only view one file at a time. 3. Touch View. The file’s contents are displayed in a separate window.
9.2.8
Loading a File You can reconfigure Victoria Combo by using the settings saved in a configuration file. 1. Select the configuration file you want to use by touching it in the Contents list. To deselect a file, touch it again. 2. Touch Load. 3. Choose the module you want to load the configuration onto and touch OK. Victoria Combo is reconfigured.
9-4
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Using Files Working with Files
9.2.9
9
Transferring Files from Victoria Combo to a Computer To transfer files from Victoria Combo to any kind of computer using a TCP/IP connection, the following conditions must be fulfilled: •
the Victoria Combo and the computer must be connected via a TCP/IP connection - wired or wireless;
•
the computer must have a web browser installed on it; When connected, the computer acts as a client of Victoria Combo, which acts as a web server. By using the Victoria Combo webpage you can download the requested files to the memory of your computer.
1. Set up Victoria Combo’s TCP/IP Ethernet connection (see Setting up Networking on page 12-4). 2. Open the web browser on your computer and enter the IP address of the Ethernet port of Victoria Combo. See Figure 9.1.
Screenshots
Reports and configurations
Figure
9.1
On-line user guide
Victoria Combo welcome webpage
In the middle of the welcome web page there are three icons which enable you to display web pages where you can download: •
screenshots you have captured
•
report files and configuration files
•
the on-line manual NOTE:For remote control, see Using Remote Control for Victoria Combo on page 13-1.
Issue 8 - 06/07
9-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
9
Using Files Working with Files
9.2.10
Transferring Files from Victoria Combo to a Computer using a Compact Flash Device You can use Compact Flash (CF) memory devices to transfer files from your computer to Victoria Combo. The following CF memory devices can be fitted to Victoria Combo: •
Compact Flash digital memory cards
•
Compact Flash memory microdrives
1. Before you use the compact flash devices, make sure that you have created the following folders on the device: •
configurations
•
reports
•
results
•
screenshots
•
jwfiles\masks\user\
NOTE:Folder names must be entered using lower case letters. 2. Insert the CF device in one of the CF slots in Victoria Combo’s front module. 3. Make sure that the CF device has been properly detected by Victoria Combo and enable it.
Figure
9-6
9.2
•
Display main menu and choose Platform, then Device List, then Open. The Device List window is displayed. If the device has been detected, a green LED is displayed next to the slot where the device is installed and configured is displayed.
•
If it is not selected, touch Activation to enable the memory device.
•
Close the window.
Device List
218800
218800-8.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
9
Using Files Working with Files
4. Open the file manager window for the type of file you want to transfer Screenshots, Configurations, Reports or Measures. The files on the CF memory card are displayed in the Contents list mixed with the files in the internal memory. The Location column indicates that the files on the CF memory card are on Slot 1 or Slot 2. 5. You can now select any file from the internal memory and move it or copy it to the memory card by touching Copy or Move, and selecting the destination from the dialog box that is displayed. 6. When you have copied or moved the files to the memory card, display the Device List window as described above and disable the checkbox Activation. 7. Remove the CF memory card from the slot. 8. Insert the CF memory card into the correct slot on your computer. If your computer has a PCMCIA slot, use a standard CF-to-PCMCIA adapter11.
11. You can order it from Trend Communications (Ref. No. CCFPCMCIA)
Issue 8 - 06/07
9-7
218800-8.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
9
9-8
Using Files Working with Files
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
10
General Timing
The General Timing menu enables you to program the clock reference settings that will affect the application modules and provides a common clock. To display the Clock Reference window: 1. Touch the Main menu button, The main menu is displayed.
.
2. From the main menu, choose General Timing. 3. Choose Clock Reference. 4. Choose Open. The Clock Reference window is displayed.
Figure
10.1
Issue 8 - 06/07
Setting the clock reference
10-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
10
General Timing
To program the clock reference settings: 1. Select between Internal Reference and External Reference for the generated signal. 2. If you have selected an external reference, choose between a Clock signal or Data. This signal comes into Victoria Combo through the connector labelled Ref IN in the front module. 3. If you have chosen Clock, select the Clock Rate or User Defined, or if you have chosen Data, choose the frequency. 4. If you have chosen a User Defined Clock Rate, enter a frequency from 64 kHz to 10 MHz in steps of 8 kHz. 5. If you have chosen Data, choose between 1544 kHz or 2048 kHz for the clock source. 6. Choose whether you want the signal to be attenuated by clicking on the options in the Attenuation section. 7. If you want to send a clock synchronization signal through the Ref OUT connector, choose Enable Output and choose the frequency you want to use. The LTI (Loss of Timing Input) LED indicates whether the reference signal is being received correctly.
10-2
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Controlling Multiple Modules and Displaying LEDs
11
The commands on the Modules menu enable you to perform a Timed Test on more than module at the same time (if more than one is fitted), and to display an LED that reflects the status of more than one module. These settings can also be changed from the tester Home screen. For more information on Timed tests, see Timed Results on page 3-23 and Timed Results on page 4-22.
11.1
Introduction to Victoria Combo Modules Victoria Combo can be fitted with several modules that enable you to test on different interfaces. At the moment, four modules are available for Victoria Combo: •
STM-64/OC-192 (10 Gbit/s applications)
•
STM-16/OC-48 (2.5 Gbit/s down to 1.5 Mbit/s applications)
•
STM-16/OC-48 Next Generation (2.5 Gbit/s down to 1.5 Mbit/s applications)
•
Jitter/Wander (up to 2.5 Gbit/s) To display the Modules menu items:
1. From the main menu, choose Modules. 1. Choose the option you want to use. 2. Choose Open. The corresponding window is displayed.
11.1.1
Global Start & Autostart The Global Start & Autostart window enables you to start a Timed Test on a module, or more than one modules at a pre-programmed time. You can program the start in two ways:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
set up the test to run for a defined period, and within that period to program when counters are reset;
•
program the day and time when the test starts.
11-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
11
Controlling Multiple Modules and Displaying LEDs Introduction to Victoria Combo Modules
You can set up Victoria Combo to use both of these options at the same time - that is, start the test at a pre-defined time, and run the test for a defined period. You can also use the tester Home screen to perform these tasks. Running a Timed Test for a defined period 1. From the Registered Modules list, choose the modules you want the test to run on. 2. In the Measure Options section, to run the test for a pre-defined period, choose Enable Duration Measure. 3. Choose a Pre-Defined period or a User-Defined period - 15 minutes, 1 hour, 24 hours, 30 days or User-Defined. 4. If you have chosen a User-Defined period, choose the time unit for the test period - minutes, hours or days, and enter a number of units. 5. If you want to reset the counters (for example of errors or alarms) during the test, choose Enable Periods Measure. 6. Choose the interval for the reset frequency. 7. If you have chosen a User-Defined period, choose the time unit for the reset frequency - minutes, hours or days and enter a number of units. Starting a Timed Test at a set time 1. From the Registered Modules list, choose the modules you want the test to be run on. 2. In the Measure Autostart section, to start a test at a pre-defined time, choose Enable Autostart. 3. Using the arrows at the top of the calendar, choose the year and month when you want to start the test - for example January 2006. 4. Using the calendar, choose the date you want to start the test on. 5. Enter a time when you want the test to start. Setting up the Modules Controlled by the Start button The Global Start & Autostart window enables you to choose which modules a Timed Test is run on when you touch the Start ( ) button. 1. Display the Registered Modules list. 2. Choose the modules you want the Start button to apply to. The current state is displayed in Desktop Start State. You can also use the tester Home screen to perform this task: 1. From the column below with the Start button.
11-2
choose the modules you want to control
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Controlling Multiple Modules and Displaying LEDs Introduction to Victoria Combo Modules
11.1.2
11
Global Action The Global Action window enables you to set up the Insert button, , on the desktop to insert events one or more modules simultaneously. To set up the global action: 1. Open the Global Action window. 2. Choose the modules you want the Insert button to control. When you touch the Insert button, all the modules you have chosen.
, the events are inserted on
You can also use the tester Home screen to perform this task: 1. Touch
in the column below.
2. Choose the modules you want the Insert button to control.
11.1.3
Global LEDs The Global LEDs window enables you to display an LED reflecting the status of all the modules you choose from a list. To set up the global LED: 1. In the Global Leds window choose the modules you want to display the status of with the global LED. 2. In the Desktop Settings, choose Current Leds only, History Leds only or Current & History Leds. If you choose the last option, the upper part of the LED displays the current status and the lower half displays the history status. You can also use the tester Home screen to perform this task: 1. From the column below choose the modules you want to display the status of with the global LED. 2. Choose Current Leds only, History Leds only or Current & History Leds. If you choose the last option, the upper half of the LED displays the current status and the lower half displays the history status. The LED may be three colours:
Issue 8 - 06/07
•
Green - no event is being/has been detected
•
Red - an alarm is being/has been detected
•
Yellow - an error is being/has been detected
11-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
11
Controlling Multiple Modules and Displaying LEDs Saving the Configuration of a Module
Global LED
Figure
11.2
11.1
Global LED icon
Saving the Configuration of a Module Victoria Combo enables you to save the current configuration of each of the modules fitted to the tester in separate configuration files. This means that the configuration of a module can easily be restored. For information on configuration files, see Using Files on page 9-1. 1. Touch the Main menu button, The main menu is displayed.
.
2. From the main menu, choose the application module you want to save the configuration of. 3. Choose Save configuration. The configuration is saved in a file. The filename is the current date and time. You can change the filename by using the file manager (see Changing the Properties of a File on page 9-2). 4. In the Save configuration window, choose OK. When the configuration has been saved, the Save configuration dialog is displayed. 5. Choose OK again
11.3
Saving the Configuration of the Whole Tester Victoria Combo enables you to save the current configuration of all the modules fitted to the tester in a global configuration file. This means that the configuration can easily be restored. For information on configuration files, see Using Files on page 9-1. 1. Touch the Main menu button, The main menu is displayed.
.
2. Choose Home.
11-4
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Controlling Multiple Modules and Displaying LEDs Saving the Configuration of the Whole Tester
11
3. Choose Save global. The configuration is saved in a file. The filename is the current date and time. You can change the filename by using the file manager (see Changing the Properties of a File on page 9-2). 4. In the Save configuration window, choose OK.
Issue 8 - 06/07
11-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
11
11-6
Controlling Multiple Modules and Displaying LEDs Saving the Configuration of the Whole Tester
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Setting up the Victoria Combo Platform
12
The Platform menu enables you to set up aspects of Victoria Combo that apply to the whole tester, not just individual modules. To display the Platform menu: 1. Touch Main menu, . The main menu is displayed. 2. From the main menu, choose Platform. 3. Choose the option you want to use. 4. Choose Open. The corresponding window is displayed.
12.1
Changing the Language The Languages option enables you to change the user interface language used on Victoria Combo. At present, English, French, German and Spanish are available: 1. From the Platform menu choose Languages. The Language Selection window is displayed. 2. Choose the language you want to use from the list. 3. Choose OK. The language changes.
12.2
Displaying Software and Firmware Versions and Changing Software There are two options displayed when you choose Software & Firmware View Versions and Update.
12.2.1
Displaying Software and Firmware Versions The Software & Firmware window displays the version of software and firmware installed on your Victoria Combo.
Issue 8 - 06/07
12-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
12
Setting up the Victoria Combo Platform Displaying Software and Firmware Versions and Changing Software
12.2.2
Changing Software The Software & Firmware Update window enables you to perform actions on the software on your Victoria Combo. You can: •
Upgrade the current software
•
Install new software on your Victoria Combo when you fit a new module for the first time
•
Remove software from Victoria Combo when you remove a module from the tester
•
None - the recommended setting when you are using Victoria Combo for testing If you are installing or upgrading software, you can use either a website or a memory device (microdrive or memory card) installed in slot 1 of Victoria Combo.
Figure
12.1
Software & Firmware Update
To perform one of these actions: 1. In the Software & Firmware Update window, choose the Action you want to perform. 2. If you have chosen Install or Remove, enter the Module name you want to perform the operation on. For the STM-16/OC-48 module, enter stm16ag for the STM-64/OC-192 module: stm64ag, for the Next Generation STM-16/OC-48 module: nextgag, for the Jitter/Wander module: jitwanag 3. Choose the Source for the new software.
12-2
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Setting up the Victoria Combo Platform Setting the Time and Date
12
4. If you have chosen Memory Card, make sure that it is inserted into slot 1 in Victoria Combo and that it is inserted correctly (with the label on the card facing away from the front of Victoria Combo). Brand name label
Face not containing the Brand name label
Slot 1
Front module
Slot 2
Figure
12.2
Insertion of a compact flash memory card into slot 1
5. If you have chosen Memory Card, make sure that it is active (see Device List on page 12-4). 6. If you have chosen URL, enter a URL (web site address) for the software download site. If you want to use this option, Victoria Combo must be connected to a LAN. 7. To start the action you have chosen, touch Apply. 8. When the process has finished, to make the changes take effect, you MUST switch Victoria Combo off and then on again.
12.3
Setting the Time and Date This window enables you to set the date and time Victoria Combo uses. To set the date and time: 1. In the Date & Time section, use the arrows on the calendar to choose the month and year. 2. Using the calendar, choose the day. 3. Enter the Time in the three boxes in 24-hour clock format. 4. To change the date and time, touch Set Date & Time. The Actual Date & Time at the top of the window changes to the values you have set.
Issue 8 - 06/07
12-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
12
Setting up the Victoria Combo Platform Device List
12.4
Device List The Device List window displays information about the type of devices located in Slots 1 and 2. These devices may be: •
IBM Microdrive
•
Ethernet Cards
•
Wireless LAN Cards To enable or disable a device, touch the checkbox next to the entry for the device. A status LED indicates whether the devices are activated or not. Before you remove a device, it must be disabled.
Figure
12.3
12.5
Device List
Setting up Networking Victoria Combo may be connected to a TCP/IP network. This enables you to download software updates from the Internet, use Remote Control to control Victoria Combo, and transfer files from Victoria Combo to a PC or server. Before you can use your Victoria Combo in this way, you must set up networking.
12.5.1
Host Configuration When Victoria Combo is connected to a TCP/IP network, for it to work properly with the network, you must enter information about the configuration of the network server. 1. Enter the Main Parameters for the network server Victoria Combo is going to be connected to - Host Name, and Domain.
12-4
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Setting up the Victoria Combo Platform Setting up Networking
12
2. In the Name Resolution section, enter the DNS Primary and DNS Secondary Servers and the Search Domain. DNS resolution is performed by the concatenation of the Host Name and Search Domain fields. The Domain field contains the domain generally used by Victoria Combo. Because Victoria is portable and may be connected to different networks, the Domain makes it easier to reconnect without changing the IP settings. 3. If you want these settings to apply for this session only, touch Apply. If you want the settings to be the default settings, touch Reload. The three possible Ethernet interfaces on Victoria Combo are listed at the bottom of the Host Configuration window. You can set up the Ethernet interfaces to have different settings. The buttons to the right-hand side of the list are shortcuts to the Ethernet options on the Networking menu (for more information, see the following chapters).
12.5.2
Ethernet Ports Victoria Combo has three ports that can be used as Ethernet interfaces: •
Eth0: the Ethernet window enables you to configure the Physical 10BaseT (RJ45 connector);
•
Eth1: configuration for the port for the wireless LAN 802.11 card;
•
Eth2: configuration for the port for the wireless LAN 802.11 card.
1. If the network you are going to connect Victoria Combo to has a DHCP server, this server will assign a dynamic IP Address to Victoria Combo. To set this up, choose Get an IP Address from a DHCP Server and enter a DHCP Client Name for Victoria Combo. 2. If there is no DCHP server on the network, choose Specify an IP address and enter an IP Address, Network mask, and Default Gateway (if necessary). If there is no gateway, the Default Gateway is set to 0.0.0.0. 3. If you want to, you can define more than one DNS servers for resolving the host name for the same Ethernet port. To do this, in Specific Interface Resolution, enter a DNS and Search Domain. This means that is the first Search Domain cannot resolve the host name, the second one is used. 4. If you want these settings to apply for this session only, touch Apply. If you want the settings to be the default settings, touch Reload. 5. To activate this Ethernet port, choose Enable this Network Interface. 6. If you want these settings to apply for this session only, touch Apply. If you want to set the settings as the default settings, touch Reload. The MAC Address of the Ethernet card is displayed at the bottom of the window.
Issue 8 - 06/07
12-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
12
Setting up the Victoria Combo Platform Setting up the Serial Port
12.5.3
Ethernet CF Card 1 and 2 The windows for configuring the Ethernet Slot 1 and 2 have the same parameters as the Ethernet window described in the previous section. Set up the Ethernet slot as described above. You can also Activate the port in the same way as enabling the Device List option. An LED indicates if the port is activated. Setting up a wireless interface When you are setting up the Ethernet interface for slots 1 and 2, you can also set up a wireless interface: 1. In the Networking Ethernet CF Card window, touch Wireless. The Wireless window is displayed. 2. Enter the ESSID12 (the 802.11 Network Name) 3. Choose an operating mode. This depends on the type of network you are working on (Ad-hoc or Managed). 4. Select the Transmission Rate and the Channel Frequency from the lists. 5. As an optional security feature, you can encrypt the communication by entering an Access Key. The maximum length is 64 characters. 6. If you want these settings to apply for this session only, touch Apply. If you want these settings to be the default settings, touch Reload.
12.6
Setting up the Serial Port The serial port on Victoria Combo enables you to print reports and results, see Printing a File on page 9-4. To make sure that Victoria Combo works correctly with another device, you must set up the following parameters: •
Baud rate: 50 to 115200 bit/s
•
Data bits: 7, 8
•
Stop bits: 1, 2
•
Parity: None, Even, Odd
•
Flow Control: None, Xon/Xoff, RTS/CTS, DTR/DSR
•
Port Use: Unused, Printer, Transfer, Remote User Interface
•
Printer Driver: DPU-414, IBM or Epsom
•
EOL (End of Line Character): LF+CR, CR+LF, CR, LF, None
12. ESSID: Extended Service Set Identifier
12-6
218800
218800-8.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Setting up the Victoria Combo Platform Changing Backlight Settings
Figure
12.7
12.4
12
Serial Port configuration
Changing Backlight Settings The Backlight Settings window enables you to change the brightness of the touch screen on Victoria Combo to suit the lighting conditions you are working in. 1. Open the Backlight Settings window. 2. Touch the arrows at the ends of the scroll bar to increase or decrease the brightness in small steps. OR To change the brightness in larger steps, touch the scroll bar to the right or left of the current position marker. OR Drag the current position marker to the position where the brightness is correct.
12.8
Changing the Audio Settings The Audio Settings window enables you to switch the buzzer on and off, change the volume of the buzzer and enable audible signals for certain events. 1. To switch the buzzer on or off, touch Buzzer Enable. The buzzer toggles between on and off. 2. Touch the arrows at the ends of the scroll bar to increase or decrease the volume in small steps. OR To change the volume in larger steps, touch the scroll bar to the right or left of the current position marker. OR Drag the current position marker to the position where the volume is correct.
Issue 8 - 06/07
12-7
218800-8.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
12
Setting up the Victoria Combo Platform Setting up the Configuration lock
3. To try out the volume you have set, touch Test. 4. Tick Beep in the events checkbox to receive an audible signal when events are detected in tests.
Figure
12.9
12.5
Audio Settings panel
Setting up the Configuration lock To avoid unwanted misconfigurations, you can lock the configuration of Victoria Combo with a password. To lock the configuration: 1. Open the Configuration Lock panel. 2. Type a secret password in the Password text field. 3. Confirm the password by typing it again in the Confirmation field. 4. Press Apply. If the Password field matches the Confirmation field, you will receive a Configuration locked message and it will not be possible to change the configuration any more. The Trend logo in the Start menu changes to: If the Password field does not mach the Confirmation field, a Passwords do not match message is shown and the configuration will not be locked. To unlock the configuration: 1. Open the Configuration Lock panel. 2. Type your password in the Password text field. 3. If the password is correct, the configuration is unlocked. The locked trend logo in the Start menu changes to: . If the password is incorrect, the configuration remains locked.
12-8
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Using Remote Control for Victoria Combo 13.1
13
Getting Started Before you can use the Victoria Combo remote control, you must install some software on your PC. The files for Remote Control for Victoria Combo are included on the CDROM. These are four files: •
VictoriaComboLauncher-(version No.).exe for Victoria Combo Launcher
•
VictoriaCombo-Platform-(version No.).exe for Platform
•
stm16ag-(version No.).exe for STM-16/OC-48 application module
•
stm64ag-(version No.).exe for STM-64/OC-192 application module
•
nextgag-(version No.).exe for Next Generation STM-16/OC-48 application module
•
jitwanag-(version No.).exe for Jitter/Wander application module Copy these files to your PC and click on each one to install it, starting from VictoriaComboLauncher-(version No.).exe. The Remote Launcher application will be installed to your PC.
Issue 8 - 06/07
13-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
13
Using Remote Control for Victoria Combo Getting Started
Figure
13.1
Application launcher: welcome window
When you have installed the software, a new option called Victoria Combo is created in the Start menu of your PC, within the Programs. Select the option Victoria Combo Launcher to open the remote control application. 1. Make sure that the PC and the Victoria Combo are correctly connected to a wired or wireless network. For more information, see Setting up Networking on page 12-4. •
LAN connection (wired): use the Ethernet cable supplied (see Preliminary Checking on page 1-1).
•
LAN connection (wireless): use a standard Compact Flash IEEE 802.11 to establish the connection.
•
Ethernet direct connection between the Victoria Combo and your computer: use the Ethernet crossover cable supplied (the cable with red ends), see Preliminary Checking on page 1-1.
2. To create a connection, click on New (see the figure above). The Victoria Combo definition dialog is displayed.
Figure
13.2
Application Launcher: Enter the IP address
3. Enter a Name (Description). 4. Enter the IP address of the Ethernet port of Victoria Combo in Host, 5. Enter the Port number. By default this is 3000 when you connect a Victoria Combo to the same LAN that your computer is connected to. If you want to connect a Victoria Combo to a remote site through the Internet, you must ask the network administrator of the LAN for an IP address for Victoria Combo. You must then enter this address in Host and also the value of the Port. 6. Choose OK. A description of the new connection appears in the Victoria Combo window. The Advanced button is for technical support purposes. 7. In the Victoria Combo Launcher window, choose Open. A Task window is loaded from Victoria Combo, and a series of Java classes is loaded. This only happens once; when Victoria Combo is connected for the first time or when a new software version is used. •
13-2
Wait until all the Java classes are downloaded from Victoria Combo to your computer.
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Using Remote Control for Victoria Combo Getting Started
13
•
When the downloading process has finished, a desktop window is automatically opened. This window is identical to the interface on Victoria Combo.
•
There is an icon at the bottom right-hand corner of the window. Wait until the icon changes to a hand and the icon just beside it (a network LAN) has one green LED, and the remaining ones are dark grey. Now you can use the remote interface in the same way as the interface on Victoria Combo.
Status Icon Disabled
Figure
13.3
Application Launcher: Remote GUI
There are two differences between the remote control window and the Victoria Combo user interface: •
The Print Screen button is disabled: you can capture the windows of remote control directly using your PC13. This is to avoid conflicts due to Victoria Combo’s memory being filled by several users making screenshots at a time.
13. The screens are captured the same way as any window on your PC.
Issue 8 - 06/07
13-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
13
Using Remote Control for Victoria Combo Getting Started
•
There is an additional status icon: this icon shows the Role of the user. There are three types of role: •
Viewer: this type of user can only see what other users connected to this Victoria Combo are doing, but he cannot control the tester;
•
Controller: this type of user can both see what is displayed and control the tester;
•
Owner: this type of user is the same than the previous one, but this user can edit a message that other users can see (for example a request to be the only user that sets up the Victoria Combo).
All these roles can be selected using remote control: 8. Click the Status icon. The Change Role dialog is displayed as shown in Figure 13.4:
Figure
13-4
13.4
Roles
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Using Remote Control for Victoria Combo Getting Started
13
9. To change to the Owner role, select it and type a message in the text field at the bottom of the window. 10.Choose OK to validate the selection. Other remote users of the Victoria Combo will see the message from the owner in the text field at the top of the window.
Figure
13.5
Issue 8 - 06/07
Message editing for the Owner role
13-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
13
13-6
Using Remote Control for Victoria Combo Getting Started
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
14
Support
The Support menu item displays the main page of the internal browser of Victoria Combo. This page includes links to: •
the Trend web site (http://www.trendcomms.com/)
•
the ITU-T web site (http://www.itu.org/)
•
Google search engine (http://www.google.com)
•
contact the Customer Service Centre of Trend Communications S.L
•
the Quick Reference Guide for Victoria Combo The Internet links will only work if the Victoria Combo is connected to a network.
Issue 8 - 06/07
14-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
14
14-2
Support
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Technical Specifications
A1.1
A1
Platform
General • Modular structure • Basic Architecture: Front module display version (CDISP) or Front module non-display version (CPROBE), Application Module/Modules (not included), Rear Module (CREAR) • Max. number of modules: up to 4 modules • User-removable modules • Multi-position desk leg • Rubber protection corners in Front and Rear Modules • Removable multi-use strap for handling and transport • Optional security lock cable is available (KL2) • Display: 10.4î TFT colour touch screen with SVGA resolution (800x600 pixel)
Dimensions • • • • •
Dimensions of Front Module (w x h x d): 270 x 220 x 34.3 mm Dimensions of Rear Module (w x h x d): 270 x 220 x 28.1mm Weight of Front Module (without battery pack): 1,6 kg Weight of Rear Module (without battery pack): 0,9 kg Weight of a battery pack: 0,3 kg
Connectors • • • • • • • • • •
USB Host: double USB port for external mouse and keyboard 10BaseT: RJ45 connector for LAN connection USB Peripheral: USB port for future applications Stereo IN: Stereo input for future applications Stereo OUT: Stereo output for future applications Ref.IN: BNC connector for reference clock input Ref.OUT: BNC connector for reference clock output RS-232C: DB9 connector for serial RS232C interface Audio IN/OUT: Audio Input/Output for external headset (future applications) External 18VDC power input: To connect an adapter/charger (mains)
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
Platform
Reference Clock Reference clock input (Ref.IN Connector) • Coded signals: E1 (0 dB), E1(-20 dB), T1 (0 dB), T1 (-20 dB). Line attenuation compensation up to 6dB • Clock signals: 1544 kHz, 2048 kHz, any clock signal from 64 kHz to 10 MHz multiple of 8 kHz. Level: 0.5 to 2.5 Vpp
Reference clock output (Ref.OUT Connector) • User-selectable: 1544 kHz or 2048 kHz • Level: 2.5 Vpp on 75 Ohm
Slots • Two Compact Flash Slots type 2 • One Expansion Slot for future applications
Audio • Built-in Microphone • Built-in speaker
LEDs Front panel • • • •
ON: Indicates ON state DC: Indicates DC power supply from the adapter/charger connected to the mains BATT: Indicates power supply from batteries LAN: Indicates LAN activity
Side panel • LK: Detection of LAN • PW: Power
Graphical User Interface • Window-based • A set of windows for every installed application module
Remote Control • Via SW Application and TCP/IP connection through the RJ-45 10BaseT connector • Remote GUI is identical to local GUI
Files/Export • • • • • • •
Reports: To be printed to a file or external serial printer. ASCII plain text or CSV Results: To be displayed (histograms and time graphs) on the screen Configurations: To configure the tester automatically Screenshots: JPEG files of GUI screens Files can be downloaded to a computer from Victoria Combo by using a standard browser and a TCP/IP connection Files can be transferred from the internal memory to a Compact Flash memory card Files can be loaded from an external Compact Flash memory card to the internal memory of Victoria Combo
Connectivity • Ethernet (through RJ-45 10BaseT connector) • Wireless LAN (through WL card in anyone of Compact Flash slots) • Serial connection (through RS232C connector)
A1-2
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Platform
A1
Internal Browser • Application No1: On-line manual • Application No.2: Access to a set of per-selected support links
SW Upgrade • Through an Internet connection to a specific Trend website • Through compact flash memory microdrive card
Switch-Off modes • Standard: Switch to off-state, the next switch off forces the SW boot process • Sleep mode: Switch to a low-consumption state; the switch on from this state is instantaneous
External Power Supply • By means of an AC Adapter/Charger connected to the mains • Input voltage: 95-260 VAC, 47-63 Hz • Output voltage: 18 VDC, 130 W (7.22A)
Battery Power Supply • • • •
User-replaceable batteries Battery charging time (1 or 2 pack): 2 hours (85% of charge) to 3 hours (98% or charge) Battery type: 4.1Ah, 14.8 V Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion); one or two battery packs Two battery compartments: One in the Front Module, and an additional one in the Rear Module to extend the operating time or making possible the replacement with the tester switched on • Battery operating time: depending on the number and type of modules (typ.: 1 to 2 hour with one battery pack and one SDH/SONET 10Gbit/s module)
Safety • Electrical safety: EN60950
Electromagnetic Compatibility • Radiated EMI: EN55022 • Electromagnetic Emission: - EN61000-3-2 - EN61000-3-3 • Immunity to EMI: - EN61000-4-2 (ESD) - EN61000-4-3 (RFI) - EN61000-4-4 - EN61000-4-5 - EN61000-4-6 - EN61000-4-11
Environmental conditions • • • •
Operates from 0 to 45 ½C Operates from 0 to 30½ with 90 to 100% of relative humidity Storage: -25 to +70 ½C Humidity: 5 to 90%, without condensation
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
Platform
NOTE: These specification are subject to modification without prior notice
A1-4
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
10G Module
A1.2
A1
10G Module
Optical Interfaces • • • • •
Bit rate: 9953280 kbit/s Interfaces according to ITU-T G.691 S.64.1 (1310nm) or S64.2b (1550nm) Field-removable FC (default), SC (option C10SC) or ST (option C10ST) connectors Automatic disconnection of the receiver for overload protection Removable transmitter and receiver optical sub-modules
Modes • Standard (SDH/SONET termination) • Through mode for all the interfaces
SDH General • According to G.707 and O.181 • Programmable content of tributaries not being tested
Mappings • • • •
C-4-64c in STM-64 C-4-16c in STM-64 C-4-4c in STM-64 C-4 in STM-64
Programmable Bytes • Edition and display in hexadecimal or by descriptor • RSOH: All the RSOH bytes • MSOH: Columns in positions 1, 4 and 7 of every STM-1 tributary, rows 5 to 9 excepting B1, B2 and M0-M1 and bits 6 to 8 of K2. In first STM-1 tributary page: D4-D12, S1, Z1, Z2, E2 • HO-POH (VC-4, VC-3): J1, C2, G1, H4, K3, N1
Path Trace • Generation, analysis and expected 16- and 64-byte messages in J0, J1
Errors • Insertion and detection of FAS error, OOF, B1, B2, MS-REI, HP-B3, HP-REI, slips (detection) and bit errors (TSE) • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate (Mx10 -N with M, N programmable. M= 0.9, 1, 1.1; N= 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Alarms • Insertion and detection of LOS, LOF, RS-TIM, MS-AIS, MSF-AIS, MS-RDI, AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-UNEQ, HP-RDI, HP-TIM, HP-PLM, RFI, LSS, AIS pattern • Insertion mode: continuous, burst of M frames with alarm, repetitive M/N burst • Repetitive M/N burst applies to: OOF, LOF, MS-AIS, AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-RDI
Pointer Events • Increment, decrement, manual value with or without NDF, invalid pointer in AU-4, AU-4-4c, AU-4-16c and AU-464c • G.783/O.172 pointer sequences • Programming of SS bits
TCM • Generation and analysis of N1 • Events generated: TC-IEC, TC-OEI, TC-REI, TC-AIS, TC-LTC, TC-UNEQ, TC-ODI, TC-RDI, TC-TIM • Detection, display, performance calculation and storage of events: TC-IEC, TC-OEI, TC-REI, TC-AIS, TC-LTC, TCUNEQ, TC-ODI, TC-RDI, TC-TIM • B3 compensation • Analysis and generation of APId (Access Point Identifier)
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
10G Module
Frame OH Capture • Capture of OH bytes on several consecutive frames • Capture Resolution: 1 frame • Types of capture (selectable): continuous (display of OH bytes), manual, triggered by event (MS-AIS, AU-AIS, MSRDI), triggered by byte value detection (equal, different or byte mask) • Type of capture mode by trigger starting from trigger detection: pre-trigger (N previous frames), post-trigger (Next N frames), centred (N/2 previous and (N-1)/2 next frames)
FEC (C10FEC) • According to G.707 (In-Band FEC) • Generation: correct FEC blocs, correctable FEC blocs • Analysis: correct FEC blocs, errored correctable FEC blocs, errored uncorrectable FEC blocs, total errored FEC blocs
SONET General • According to ANSI.105-1995 and Telcordia GR.253 • Programmable content of tributaries not being tested
Mappings • • • •
STS-192c SPE in OC-192 STS-48c SPE in OC-192 STS-12c SPE in OC-192 STS-3c SPE in OC-192
Programmable Bytes • Display of all bytes and edition in hexadecimal or by descriptor of: • SOH: A1, A2, J0, C1 • LOH: Columns in positions 1, 4 and 7 of every OC-3 tributary, rows 5 to 9 excepting B1, B2 and M0-M1 and bits 6 to 8 of K2. In first OC-3 tributary page: D4-D12, S1, Z1, Z2, E2 • STS-POH: J1, C2, G1, H4, K3, Z5
J0, J1 Trail Trace • Generation, analysis and expected 16- and 64-byte messages in J0, J1
Errors • Insertion and detection of FAS error, SEF, B1, B2, REI-L, STS-B3, REI-P, slips (detection) and bit errors (TSE) • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate (Mx10 -N with M, N programmable. M= 0.9, 1, 1.1; N= 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Alarms • Insertion and detection of LOS, LOF, TIM-S, AIS-L, RDI-L, AIS-P, LOP-P, UNEQ-P, RDI-P, TIM-P, PLM-P, LSS, pattern AIS • Insertion mode: continuous, burst of M frames with alarm, repetitive M/N burst • Repetitive M/N burst applies to: SEF, LOF, AIS-L, AIS-P, LOP-P, RDI-P
Pointer Events • Increment, decrement, manual value with or without NDF, invalid pointer in STS-192c SPE, STS-48c SPE, STS-12c SPE and STS-3c SPE • G.783/O.172 pointer sequences • Programming of SS bits
TCM • Generation and analysis of N1 • Events generated: TC-IEC, TC-OEI, TC-REI, TC-AIS, TC-LTC, TC-UNEQ, TC-ODI, TC-RDI, TC-TIM • Detection, display, performance calculation and storage of events: TC-IEC, TC-OEI, TC-REI, TC-AIS, TC-LTC, TCUNEQ, TC-ODI, TC-RDI, TC-TIM • B3 compensation • Analysis and generation of APId (Access Point Identifier)
A1-6
218800
218800-8.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
10G Module
A1
Frame OH Capture • Capture of OH bytes on several consecutive frames • Capture Resolution: 1 frame • Types of capture (selectable): continuous (display of OH bytes), manual, triggered by event (AIS-L, AIS-P, RDI-L), triggered by byte value detection (equal, different or byte mask) • Type of capture mode by trigger starting from trigger detection: pre-trigger (N previous frames), post-trigger (Next N frames), centred (N/2 previous and (N-1)/2 next frames)
FEC (option C10FEC) • According to G.707 (In-Band FEC) • Generation: correct FEC blocs, correctable FEC blocs • Analysis: correct FEC blocs, errored correctable FEC blocs, errored uncorrectable FEC blocs, total errored FEC blocs
Test Patterns • • • •
The following test patterns can be generated/analysed: PRBS23, PRBS31: normal or inverted PRBS11, PRBS15 for BERT in OH bytes: normal or inverted Word: user defined, all zeros, all ones
Functions Results • Counters, errored seconds and rate for all events: errors, alarms and pointer events
Trace • Events are shown graphically in time plots and histograms that have advanced filter, identification and quantization functions and a zoom from 1 s to 1 h
Performance • Performance measurements in line with ITU-T M.2101, M.2110, M.2120, G.826, G.828 and G.829. Counter, rate, unavailability and PASS/FAIL indication of compliance with programmed objectives
Round Trip Delay • In all interfaces; range from 1 ms to 10 s
Auto Configuration • Mapping of the incoming signal • PRBS
FastScan • Search the incoming signal for all types of errors, alarms and events
Transparency Test • Generation and analysis of PRBS pattern in DCC channels or E1, E2, F1, N1 and N2 bytes • Bit error counter, rate and errored seconds • Seconds with alarm counter for LSS
APS • • • • •
Measurement of disruption time for any STM-N/OC-N Tributaries: SDH, SONET Triggers: MS-AIS/AIS-L, AU-AIS/AIS-P and Pattern AIS Range: 1 ms to 10 s Resolution: 1 ms
Optical Power Measurement • Range: +2 to -40 dBm • Resolution: ±0,1 dB
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-7
218800-8.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
10G Module
Frequency Measurement • In bit/s with deviation in ppm • ITU-T/ANSI in-range or out-of-range indication
Frequency Offset of the Transmission Clock • Up to 40 ppm in steps of 0.01 ppm
General • Dimensions (w x h x d): 270 x 220 x 50.8 mm • Weigh: 1,3 kg
Safety • Electrical safety: EN60950
Electromagnetic Compatibility • Radiated EMI: EN55022 • Electromagnetic Emission: - EN61000-3-2 - EN61000-3-3 • Immunity to EMI: - EN61000-4-2 (ESD) - EN61000-4-3 (RFI) - EN61000-4-4 - EN61000-4-5 - EN61000-4-6 - EN61000-4-11
Environmental conditions • Operates from 0 to 45 ½C • Storage: -25 to +70 ½C • Humidity: 5 to 90%, without condensation
NOTE: These specification are subject to modification without prior notice
A1-8
218800
218800-8.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2.5G Module
A1.3
A1
2.5G Module
Electrical Interfaces • BNC (default), DIN 1.6/5.6 (option C25DIN55) • Rates: 2048 kbit/s HDB3 and AMI, 8448 kbit/s HDB3 and AMI, 34368 kbit/s HDB3, 139264 kbit/s CMI, 155520 kbit/s CMI • Optional: 1544 kbit/s B8ZS and AMI (option C25554), 44736 kbit/s B3ZS & AMI (option C25552), DS3-HI and DSX-3 pulses (with AD045 accessory), 51840 kbit/s B3ZS (option C25551) • Balanced Bantam (accessory AD300), Siemens (accessory AD320) and RJ48 (accessory AD322) for 1544 kbit/s and 2048 kbit/s • Interfaces according to G.703, ANSI T1.102 and G.772 • Gain: 0, 20, 26, 30 dB from 1544 kbit/s to 51840 kbit/s; 0, 20, 26 dB for 139264 kbit/s and 0, 20 dB for 155520 kbit/s
Optical Interfaces • • • • • •
Built-in, field-removable connectors for 155520 kbit/s, 622080 kbit/s and 2488320 kbit/s Interfaces according to the ITU-T G.957 L-16.1 (1310nm) and L-16.2 (1550nm) FC (default), SC (option C25SC) or ST (option C25ST) connectors Automatic disconnection of the receiver for overload protection 1310 nm transmitter (modules C25C1, C25C4) and 1550 nm transmitter (modules C25C2, C25C4) Via external optical micromodules fed by the equipment for 34368 kbit/s (option C255531), 51840 kbit/s (option C255511), and 155520 kbit/s
Modes • Standard (SDH/SONET/PDH/T-Carrier termination) • Through mode for all the interfaces
SDH General • According to G.707 and O.181 • Programmable content of tributaries not being tested
Mappings • • • • • •
C-4-16c in STM-16 C-4-4c in STM-4 and STM-16 C-4 (unstructured or with framed E4) in STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16. C-3 (unstructured or with framed E3 or DS3) in STM-0, STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 (both with an AU-3 or AU-4) C-12 (unstructured or with framed E1, asynchronous or byte synchronous) in STM-0, STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 C-11 (unstructured or with framed DS1) in STM-0, STM-1, STM-4 or STM-16
Programmable Bytes • • • • • •
Editing and display in hexadecimal or by descriptor RSOH: A1, A2, J0/C1 MSOH: K1, K2, S1 HO-POH (VC-4, VC-3): J1, C2, G1, H4, K3, N1 LO-POH (VC-3): J1, C2, G1, H4, K3 LO-POH (VC-12, VC-11): V5, J2, N2, K4
J0, J1, J2 Path Trace • Generation, analysis and expected 16- and 64-byte messages in J0, J1 and J2
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-9
218800-8.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
2.5G Module
Errors • Insertion and detection of ECOD, EFAS, OOF, B1, B2, MS-REI, HP-B3, HP-REI, LP-B3, LP-REI, BIP-2, slips (detection) and bit errors (TSE) • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate (Mx10 -N with M, N programmable. M= 0.9, 1, 1.1; N= 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Alarms • Insertion and detection of LOS, LOF, RS-TIM, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-UNEQ, HP-RDI, HP-TIM, HP-PLM, TU-LOM, TU-AIS, TU-LOP, LP-UNEQ, LP-RDI, RFI, LP-TIM, LP-PLM, LSS, pattern AIS • Insertion mode: continuous, burst of M frames with alarm, repetitive M/N burst • Repetitive M/N burst applies to: OOF, LOF, MS-AIS, AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-RDI, TU-LOM, TU-AIS, TU-LOP, LP-RDI
Pointer Events • Increment, decrement, manual value with or without NDF, invalid pointer in AU-4, AU-3, TU-3, TU-2, TU-12 and TU-11 • G.783/O.172 pointer sequences • Programming of SS bits
TCM • Generation and analysis of N1 and N2 • Events generated: TC-IEC, TC-OEI, TC-REI, TC-AIS, TC-LTC, TC-UNEQ, TC-ODI, TC-RDI, TC-TIM • Detection, display, performance calculation and storage of events: TC-IEC, TC-OEI, TC-REI, TC-AIS, TC-LTC, TCUNEQ, TC-ODI, TC-RDI, TC-TIM • B3 or BIP-2 compensation • Analysis and generation of APId (Access Point Identifier)
SONET General • According to ANSI.105-1995 and Telcordia GR.253 • Programmable content of tributaries not being tested
Mappings • • • • • •
STS-48c STS -12c STS-3c bulk or with framed E4 STS-1 bulk or with framed DS3 or E3 VT-2 bulk or with framed E1 (asynchronous or byte synchronous) VT-1.5 bulk or with framed DS1
Programmable Bytes • • • • •
Display of all bytes and editing in hexadecimal or by descriptor of: SOH: A1, A2, J0, C1 LOH: K1, K2, S1 STS-POH: J1, C2, G1, H4, K3, Z5 VT-POH: J2, V5, K4, Z6
J0, J1, J2 Path Trace • Generation, analysis and expected 16- and 64-byte messages in J0, J1 and J2 • Errors • Insertion and detection of ECOD, EFAS, SEF, B1, B2, REI-L, STS-B3, REI-P, VT-B3, REI-V, BIP-2, slips (detection) and bit errors (TSE) • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate (Mx10 -N with M, N programmable. M= 0.9, 1, 1.1; N= 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Alarms • Insertion and detection of LOS, LOF, TIM-S, AIS-L, RDI-L, AIS-P, LOP-P, UNEQ-P, RDI-P, TIM-P, PLM-P, LOM-V, AISV, LOP-V, UNEQ-V, RDI-V, RFI-V, TIM-V, PLM-V, LSS, pattern AIS • Insertion mode: continuous, burst of M frames with alarm, repetitive M/N burst • Repetitive M/N burst applies to: SEF, LOF, AIS-L, AIS-P, LOP-P, RDI-P, LOM-V, AIS-V, LOP-V, RDI-V
A1-10
218800
218800-8.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2.5G Module
A1
Pointer Events • Increment, decrement, manual value with or without NDF, invalid pointer in STS-3c, STS-1, VT-2, VT-1.5 • G.783/O.172 pointer sequences • Programming of SS bits
TCM • Generation and analysis of N1 and N2 • Events generated: TC-IEC, TC-OEI, TC-REI, TC-AIS, TC-LTC, TC-UNEQ, TC-ODI, TC-RDI, TC-TIM • Detection, display, performance calculation and storage of events: TC-IEC, TC-OEI, TC-REI, TC-AIS, TC-LTC, TCUNEQ, TC-ODI, TC-RDI, TC-TIM • B3 or BIP-2 compensation • Analysis and generation of APId (Access Point Identifier)
PDH Structure • 140 and 8 Mbit/s according to G.751, G.742, G.704, framed and unframed • 34 Mbit/s according to G.751 or optionally according to G.832 for transporting 14 TU-12s (options C25553, C255531), or unframed • PCM30/31 frame structure with/without CRC for 2 Mbit/s signals. Test signal in 64 or N x 64 kbit/s. CAS signalling: setup and display of the CAS multiframe and spare bits of frame 0
Errors • Insertion and detection of code errors, FAS errors, CRC errors, REBE, slips (detection) and bit errors (TSE) • For G.832 framing in 34 Mbit/s, insertion and detection of EM, REI, LP-REI, BIP-2 • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate (Mx10 -N with M, N programmable. M= 0.9, 1, 1.1; N= 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Alarms • Insertion (continuous mode) and detection of LOS, AIS, LOF, RAI, CRC-LOM, MAIS, CAS-LOM, MRAI, LSS and AIS pattern • For G.832 framing in 34 Mbit/s, insertion and detection of OOF, LOF, TIM, RDI, UNEQ, PLM, TU-AIS, TU-LOP, TU-LOM, LP-UNEQ, LP-RDI, RFI, LP-TIM, LP-PLM. Insertion mode: continuous, burst of M frames with alarm, repetitive M/N burst.
45 Mbit/s Structure • Framed M13 and C-bit according to G.752, G.704, also unframed
Errors • Insertion and detection of BPV, M-BIT, F-PAR, P-PAR, C-PAR, FEBE, slips (detection) and bit errors (TSE) • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate (Mx10 -N with M, N programmable. M= 0.9, 1, 1.1; N= 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Alarms • Insertion (continuous mode) and detection of LOS, AIS, LOF, Blue Alarm, IDLE, RAI (Yellow Alarm), LSS and AIS pattern
1.5 Mbit/s Structure • SF & ESF framing according to ANSI T1-400-1995, SLC-96 framing according to Telcordia TR-TSY-00008, and also unframed • Fractional DS1: DS1 with test pattern in N x 64 & N x 56 kbit/s
Errors • Insertion and detection of BPV, EFAS, ECRC, slips (detection) and bit errors (TSE) • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate (Mx10 -N with M, N programmable. M= 0.9, 1, 1.1; N= 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-11
218800-8.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
2.5G Module
Alarms • Insertion (continuous mode) and detection of LOS, LOF, RAI, LSS and line AIS
Signalling • Generation and analysis of Robbed Bit signalling • Generation and analysis of Data Link messages in • ESF & SLC-96 framing
Test Patterns • The following test patterns can be generated: • PRBS11, PRBS15, PRBS20, PRBS23, PRBS31: normal or inverted • Word: user defined, all zeros, all ones, 1010, 1000 and 1100
Functions Results • Counters, errored seconds and rate for all events: errors, alarms and pointer events
Trace • Events are shown graphically in time plots and histograms that have advanced filter, identification and quantization functions and a zoom from 1 s to 1 h • Performance • Performance measurements in line with ITU-T G.821, M.2100, M.2101, M.2110, M.2120, G.826, G.828 and G.829. Counter, rate, unavailability and PASS/FAIL indication of compliance with programmed objectives
Round Trip Delay • In all interfaces; range from 1 ms to 10 s
Auto Configuration • Identification of the incoming signal parameters: network (SDH, SONET, T-Carrier, PDH or G.832), bit rate, line code, optimal gain, frame structure, mapping • PRBS test pattern
FastScan • Search the incoming signal for all types of errors, alarms and events
Transparency Test • Generation and analysis of PRBS pattern in DCC channels or E1, E2, F1, N1 and N2 bytes • Bit error counter, rate and errored seconds • Seconds with alarm counter for LSS
APS • • • • •
Measurement of disruption time for any STM-N/OC-N Tributaries: PDH, T-Carrier, SDH, SONET Triggers: MS-AIS/AIS-L, AU-AIS/AIS-P, Pattern AIS, B1 errors, B2 errors, bit error (TSE) Range: 1 ms to 10 s Resolution: 1 ms
Optical Power Measurement • Range: 0 to -40 dBm • Resolution: ±1 dB
Frequency Measurement • In bit/s with deviation in ppm • ITU-T/ANSI in-range or out-of-range indication
A1-12
218800
218800-8.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
2.5G Module
A1
Frequency Offset of the Transmission Clock • Up to 40 ppm in steps of 0.01 ppm for the integrated optical interfaces • Up to 20,000 ppm in steps of 0.01 ppm for electrical interfaces and for optical interface at 155 Mbit/s with external optical modules AD3xxx.
General • Dimensions (w x h x d): 270 x 220 x 50.8 mm • Weigh: 1.37 kg
Safety • Electrical safety: EN60950
Electromagnetic Compatibility • Radiated EMI: EN55022 • Electromagnetic Emission: - EN61000-3-2 - EN61000-3-3 • Immunity to EMI: - EN61000-4-2 (ESD) - EN61000-4-3 (RFI) - EN61000-4-4 - EN61000-4-5 - EN61000-4-6 - EN61000-4-11
Environmental conditions • Operates from 0 to 45 ½C • Storage: -25 to +70 ½C • Humidity: 5 to 90%, without condensation
NOTE: These specification are subject to modification without prior notice
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-13
218800-8.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1 A1.4
NG 2.5G Module
NG 2.5G Module
Interfaces Electrical Interfaces • BNC (default), DIN 1.6/5.6 (option C25DIN55) • Rates: 2048 kbit/s HDB3 and AMI, 8448 kbit/s HDB3 and AMI, 34368 kbit/s HDB3, 139264 kbit/s CMI, 155520 kbit/s CMI • Optional: 1544 kbit/s B8ZS and AMI (option C25554), 44736 kbit/s B3ZS & AMI (option C25552), DS3-HI and DSX-3 pulses (with AD045 accessory), 51840 kbit/s B3ZS (option C25551) • Balanced Bantam (accessory AD300), Siemens (accessory AD320) and RJ48 (accessory AD322) for 1544 kbit/s and 2048 kbit/s • Interfaces according to G.703, ANSI T1.102 and G.772 • Gain: 0, 20, 26, 30 dB from 1544 kbit/s to 51840 kbit/s; 0, 20, 26 dB for 139264 kbit/s and 0, 20 dB for 155520 kbit/s
Optical Interfaces • • • • •
Built-in, field-removable connectors for 155520 kbit/s, 622080 kbit/s and 2488320 kbit/s Interfaces according to the ITU-T G.957 L-16.1 and L-16.2 FC (default), SC or ST (optional) connectors Automatic disconnection of the receiver for overload protection 1310 nm and 1550 nm transmitter
Optical Power Measurement • Range: -5 to -32 dBm • Resolution: ±1 dB
Frequency Measurement • In Hertz and bit/s with deviation in ppm • ITU-T/ANSI in-range or out-of-range indication
Frequency Offset of the Transmission Clock • Up to 40 ppm in steps of 0.01 ppm for optical interfaces • Up to 20,000 ppm in steps of 0.01 ppm for electrical interfaces.
PDH Structure • 140 and 8 Mbit/s according to G.751, G.742, G.704, framed and unframed • 34 Mbit/s according to G.751 or optionally according to G.832 for transporting 14 TU-12s (options C25553, C255531), or unframed • PCM30/31 frame structure with/without CRC for 2 Mbit/s signals. Test signal in 64 or N x 64 kbit/s. CAS signalling: setup and display of the CAS multiframe and spare bits of frame 0
Errors • Insertion and detection of code errors, FAS errors, CRC errors, REBE, slips (detection) and bit errors (TSE) • For G.832 framing in 34 Mbit/s, insertion and detection of EM, REI, LP-REI, BIP-2 • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate (Mx10 -N with M, N programmable. M= 0.9, 1, 1.1; N= 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Alarms • Insertion (continuous mode) and detection of LOS, AIS, LOF, RAI, CRC-LOM, MAIS, CAS-LOM, MRAI, LSS and AIS pattern • For G.832 framing in 34 Mbit/s, insertion and detection of OOF, LOF, TIM, RDI, UNEQ, PLM, TU-AIS, TU-LOP, TU-LOM, LP-UNEQ, LP-RDI, RFI, LP-TIM, LP-PLM. Insertion mode: continuous, burst of M frames with alarm, repetitive M/N burst.
A1-14
218800
218800-8.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
NG 2.5G Module
A1
45 Mbit/s Structure • Framed M13 and C-bit according to G.752, G.704, also unframed
Errors • Insertion and detection of BPV, M-BIT, F-PAR, P-PAR, C-PAR, FEBE, slips (detection) and bit errors (TSE) • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate (Mx10 -N with M, N programmable. M= 0.9, 1, 1.1; N= 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Alarms • Insertion (continuous mode) and detection of LOS, AIS, LOF, Blue Alarm, IDLE, RAI (Yellow Alarm), LSS and AIS pattern
1.5 Mbit/s Structure • SF & ESF framing according to ANSI T1-400-1995, SLC-96 framing according to Telcordia TR-TSY-00008, and also unframed • Fractional DS1: DS1 with test pattern in N x 64 & N x 56 kbit/s
Errors • Insertion and detection of BPV, EFAS, ECRC, slips (detection) and bit errors (TSE) • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate (Mx10 -N with M, N programmable. M= 0.9, 1, 1.1; N= 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Alarms • Insertion (continuous mode) and detection of LOS, LOF, RAI, LSS and line AIS
Signalling • Generation and analysis of Robbed Bit signalling • Generation and analysis of Data Link messages in • ESF & SLC-96 framing
SDH General • As specified by G.707 and O.181 • Programmable content of tributaries not being tested
Mappings • The information carried by the container being tested, whatever its structure, can be: - Container filled with a test sequence (bulk container) - GFP frames mapped in the selected container
Lower and Higher Order Normalized Containers • C-11 (unstructured or with framed DS1) in STM-0, STM-1, STM-4 or STM-16 • C-12 (unstructured or with framed E1, asynchronous or byte synchronous) in STM-0, STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 (with AU-3 or AU-4) • C-3 (unstructured or with framed E3 or DS3) in STM-0, STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 (with AU-3 or AU-4) • C-4 (unstructured or with framed E4) in STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16.
Contiguously Concatenated Containers • C-4-16c in STM-16 • C-4-4c in STM-4 and STM-16
Virtually Concatenated Containers • One lower order virtual concatenation group (LO-VCG) or higher order virtual concatenation group (HO-VCG) • LO-VCG types: C-11-Xv, C-12-Xv, C-2-Xv • HO-VCG types: C-3-Xv; C-4-Xv
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-15
218800-8.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
NG 2.5G Module
Virtual Concatenation • Selection of the virtual containers (VC-x) that are members of the VCG: - HO-VCG: VC-3, VC-4 - LO-VCG: VC-11, VC-12, VC-2 - Indication of total capacity provided by resultant payload • Generation and analysis of path layer overhead (POH) for every member of the VCG (see Programmable bytes sector below details of POH bytes) - F2 byte carried by the member VC-n[1] of VCG. F2 byte of remaining members VC-n[2...X] is set to 00h - F3 byte carried by the member VC-n[1] of VCG. F3 byte of remaining members VC-n[2..X] is set to 00h - K3 byte carried by the member VC-n[1] of VCG. K3 byte of remaining members VC-n[2...X] is set to 00h • Specific generation and analysis of H4 POH byte for every member in a HO-VCG: - H4 byte with multi-frame indication and sequence indication (SQ) carried by members of a virtual concatenation group - SQ value assigned to every member of the VCG is user programmable (if LCAS is disabled) • Specific generation and analysis of K4 POH byte for every member in a LO-VCG: - K4 byte with multi-frame indication and sequence indication (SQ) carried by members of a virtual concatenation group - SQ value assigned to every member of the VCG is user programmable (if LCAS is disabled) • Differential Delay - Emulation and compensation of differential delay between individual members of a VCG - Display of maximum differential delay at the receiver • Generation and analysis of the following defects related to the alignment process in a VCG (per member) - Loss of virtual concatenation multi-frame (LOM) in a specific VC-n. Out of Multiframe 1 (OO1) or Out of Multiframe 2 (OO2) in a HO-VCG member or simple OOM in a LO-VCG member. Indication of the specific VCn where the defect or anomaly is detected - Sequence Number Mismatch (SQM) (if LCAS is disabled) - Loss of Alignment (LOA) - Severe Signal Fail (SSF) alarm display when a VCG is affected and cannot be recovered
Programmable Bytes • • • • • •
Editing and display in hexadecimal or by description RSOH: J0/C1 MSOH: K1, K2, S1 HO-POH (VC-4, VC-3): J1, C2, G1, H4, K3, N1 LO-POH (VC-3): J1, C2, G1, H4, K3 LO-POH (VC-12, VC-11): V5, J2, N2, K4
J0, J1, J2 Path Trace • Generation, analysis and expected 16 and 64-byte messages in J0, J1 and J2
Errors • Insertion and detection of ECOD, EFAS, OOF, B1, B2, MS-REI, HP-B3, HP-REI, LP-B3, LP-REI, BIP-2, slips and bit errors • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate • (1.1 x 10-3 to 0.9 x 10-9 s)
Alarms • Insertion and detection of LOS, LOF, RS-TIM, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, AU-AIS, AU-LOP, HP-UNEQ, HP-RDI, HP-TIM, HP-PLM, TU-LOM, TU-AIS, TU-LOP, LP-UNEQ, LP-RDI, RFI, LP-TIM, LP-PLM, LSS, pattern AIS • Insertion mode: continuous, burst of M frames with alarm, repetitive M/N burst
Pointer Events • Increment, decrement, manual value with or without NDF, invalid pointer in AU-4, AU-3, TU-3, TU-2, TU-12 and TU-11 • G.783/O.172 pointer sequences • Programming of SS bits
A1-16
218800
218800-8.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
NG 2.5G Module
A1
SONET General • As specified by ANSI 105-1995 and Telcordia GR.253 • Programmable content of tributaries not being tested
Mappings • The information carried by the container being tested, whatever its structure, can be: - Container filled with a test sequence (bulk container) - GFP frames mapped in the selected container
Standard Containers • • • • • •
STS-48c STS-2c STS-3c bulk or with framed E4 STS-1 bulk or with framed DS3 or E3 VT-2 bulk or with framed E1 (asynchronous or byte synchronous) VT-1.5 bulk or with framed DS1
Virtual Concatenation • Equivalent to SDH specification
Programmable Bytes • • • • •
Display of all bytes and editing in hexadecimal or by descriptor of: SOH: A1, A2, J0, C1 LOH: K1, K2, S1 STS-POH: J1, C2, G1, H4, K3, Z5 VT-POH: J2, V5, K4, Z6
J0, J1, J2 Path Trace • Generation, analysis and expected 16 and 64 byte messages in J0, J1 and J2
Errors • Insertion and detection of ECOD, EFAS, SEF, B1, B2, REI-L, STS-B3, REI-P, VT-B3, REI-V, BIP-2, slip and bit errors • Insertion mode: single, burst, repetitive burst and rate • (1.1 x 10-3 to 0.9 x 10-9 s)
Alarms • Insertion and detection of LOS, LOF, TIM-S, AIS-L, RDI-L, AIS-P, LOP-P, UNEQ-P, RDI-P, TIM-P, PLM-P, LOM-V, AISV, LOP-V, UNEQ-V, RDI-V, RFI-V, TIM-V, PLM-V, LSS, pattern AIS • Insertion mode: continuous, burst of M frames with alarm, repetitive M/N burst
Pointer Events • Increment, decrement, manual value with or without NDF, invalid pointer in STS-3c, STS-1, VT-2, VT-1.5 • G.783/O.172 pointer sequences • Programming of SS bits
SONET/SDH Tests Performance • Performance measurements as specified in ITU-T G.821, M.2100, M.2101.1, G.826, G.828 and G.829. Counter, rate, unavailability and PASS/FAIL indication of compliance with programmed objectives
Round Trip Delay • On all interfaces; range from 1ms to 10s
Transparency Test • Generation and analysis of PRBS pattern in DCC channels or E1, E2, F1, N1 and N2 bytes • Bit error counter, rate and errored seconds • Seconds with alarm counter for LSS
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-17
218800-8.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
NG 2.5G Module
APS • • • •
Measurement of disruption time for any STM-N/OC-N Tributaries: PDH, T-Carrier, SDH, SONET Range: 1 ms to 10 s Resolution: 1 ms
TCM • Generation and analysis of N1 and N2 • Events generated: TC-IEC, TC-OEI, TC-REI, TC-AIS, TC-LTC, TC-UNEQ, TC-ODI, TC-RDI, TC-TIM • Detection, display, performance calculation and storage of events: TC-IEC, TC-OEI, TC-REI, TC-AIS, TC-LTC, TCUNEQ, TC-ODI, TC-RDI, TC-TIM • B3 or BIP-2 compensation • Analysis and generation of APId (Access Point Identifier)
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) General • Emulation of LCAS protocol as specified in ITU-T Rec. G.7042 Source and Sink side behaviour emulation • Generation/analysis LCAS control packet carried by POH H4 and POH K4 field as specified in with ITU-T 7042 and G.707 • Enable or disable LCAS emulation for the VCG being tested
Source Side • LCAS source state machine for every member of VCG Tx • User initiation of the increase or decrease the capacity of the VCG: - ADD Direct Command: simultaneous selection of multiple individual members being added to VCG - REMOVE Direct Command: simultaneous selection of multiple individual members being deleted from VCG • Indication of the current state machine for each member: IDLE, NORM, DNU, ADD, REMOVE • Indication of Member Status (MST) field value received from Sink for every member: OK, FAIL-12 and Indication of Control (CTRL) field value transmitted for every member: ADD, NORM, EOS, IDLE, DNU • Indication/Programming of the Group Identification bit (GID) value and Sequence Indicator (SQ) field value for every member • Number of Re-Sequence Acknowledge (RS-ACK) messages received
Sink Side • • • •
LCAS source state machine implemented for every member of VCG being analysed Indication of the current state machine for each member: IDLE, NORM, DNU, ADD, REMOVE Indication of Control (CTRL) field value received for every member: ADD, NORM, EOS, IDLE, DNU Indication of the Group Identification bit (GID) value and Sequence Indicator (SQ) field values received for every member • Indication of Member Status (MST) field value transmitted to Source end for every member: OK, FAIL, • Programmable MST field value transmitted to the Source end for every member • Number of Re-Sequence Acknowledge (RS-ACK) messages transmitted
Errors and alarms • Detection and count of CRC-8 errors in H4 multiframe for HO-VCG and CRC-3 errors in K4 multiframe for LOVCG
PDH/T-Carrier • Generation/analysis capabilities of PDH/T-Carrier structures mapped into containers carried by a SDH/SONET signal are similar to those provided by STM-16 module • Generation/analysis capabilities of PDH/T-Carrier electrical signals are available only if electrical interfaces option is specified when ordering the NG 2.5G module. See the datasheet for Victoria Combo STM-16/OC-48 module for detailed technical data)
A1-18
218800
218800-8.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
NG 2.5G Module
A1
Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) General • GFP functionality implemented as specified in ITU-T Rec G.7041 • Generation/analysis of GFP frames that are mapped/de-mapped to the container being tested, whatever it is the container type selected • Selection of GFP transport mode: - Frame-Mapped GFP (GFP-F) - Transparent-Mapped GFP (GFP-T) • Selection of data encapsulated in generated GFP frames: - Test sequence - Ethernet MAC frames • GFP frame structure: - Core Header: PLI, cHEC - Payload Header: PTI, PFI, EXI, UPI, tHEC - Linear Extension Header (optional): CID, Spare, eHEC - Payload information - Payload FCS
Frame generation/analysis • • • •
•
• • • • •
•
• •
Core header scrambler can be enabled/disabled Payload scrambler can be enabled/disabled GFP frame delineation algorithm. Selection of DELTA value: from 1 (default) to 8 Generation/Analysis of GFP Client frames: - Client data frames as traffic for testing - Client management frames Edition/display of GFP payload header contents: - PTI: default value 000, indicates Client data frame - PFI: 1, indicates presence of FCS field 0, indicates FCS is not used - EXI: 0000, indicates null extension header 0001, indicates linear extension header 0010, indicates ring extension header Other values - UPI: value programming or by descriptor of the type of client data signal conveyed in the payload Editing/display of GFP Extension header contents (if EXI is not 0000): - Linear Extension header (if EXI=0001): CID - Extension header (if EXI=0010 or other): definition of extension header size in bytes (3-60) and programming each byte value in hex GFP-F transport mode & test sequence as client data: - User programming GFP frame size (5..65535 bytes) - User programming GFP payload bandwidth (0 1Gbps) GFP-F transport mode and Ethernet MAc frames as client data - Automatic frame size and bandwidth programming depending on Ethernet MAC Layer parameters GFP-T transport mode - Rate adaptation with insertion of 65B_PAD character - User selection of the number N of super blocks used in every GFP-T frame
Actions • Generation of Client Signal Fail (CSF) frames - This Client Management frames is transmitted once every 100ms
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-19
218800-8.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
NG 2.5G Module
Results • Event analysis - Errors: cHEC, cHEC corrected, tHEC, eHEC, FCS - Alarms: LFD, CSF indicating its type (LCS, LCCS) • Analysis of GFP bandwidth: Current, Max., Min., Mean values (bps) and % utilization of container capacity • Indication of frame structure received: if extension header is present and type of transport mode • Analysis of GFP bandwidth of specific client (CID) if extension header is present: Current, Max., Min., Mean values (bps) % utilization of container capacity • Number of received frames • GFP frame size statistics: Max, Min, Mean • GFP-T mode errors: - Superblocks [536, 520] with CRC-16 errored - Superblocks [536, 520] with CRC-16 corrected - 10B_ERR control characters
Ethernet MAC Layer General • Generation/analysis of Ethernet MAC frames encapsulated in GFP frames as specified in ITU-T G.7041 or in LAPS as specified in ITU-T X.86 • Ethernet MAC frames supported: - Ethernet II or DIX - IEEE 802.3 with 802.2 LLC (with/without SNAP) - VLAN tagged frames
Frame generation/analysis • Ethernet header fields editing: - MAC source and destination addresses - VLAN_id and priority values - EtherType value • 802.2 LLC header fields: - SSAP - DSAP - Ctrl - SNAP • Selection of Ethernet MAC payload information: - Tests sequence - QoS information; Sequence Number and Time Stamp - IP packet with editing of IP addresses • Ethernet Frame Size definition: - 64-1518 bytes without VLAN tag - 64-1522 bytes with VLAN tag - Jumbo frames: 9000 bytes (Ethernet II with LLC) • Traffic Pattern profile definition: • Constant (bps, frames/s,% container capacity): 0-1 Gbps • Burst with PIR, CIR, MBS parameters
Actions • Generation of FCS errors: single bit or multiple bit, mode: single, burst, rate
Results • MAC layer statistics: number of frames Tx, number of octets Tx, number of frames Rx, number of octets Rx, number of VLAN frames Rx, number of unicast frames Rx, number of multicast frames Rx number of broadcast frames Rx, number of Jumbo frames received • MAC layer errors: Alignment errors, Oversize errors, Fragments, FCS errors, Undersize errors, Frames too long, Length/ Type out of range errors, In range Length errors • Analysis of bandwidth: • Ethernet frame size statistics: average & histogram • Analysis of performance: - Frame Loss: number and rate - Frame transfer Delay: Max, Min, Mean - Frame Delay variation: Max, Min, Mean - Time between frames (IAT): Max, Min, Mean
A1-20
218800
218800-8.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
NG 2.5G Module
A1
• Tests as specified in RFC 2544 - Throughput test - Latency test - Frame Loss Rate - Back-to-back frames
Test Patterns • The following test patterns can be generated: • PRBS11, PRBS15, PRBS20, PRBS23, PRBS31: normal or inverted • Word: user defined, all zeros, all ones, 1010, 1000 and 1100
General Results format Events: alarms and errors • Counters, errored seconds and rate for all events: errors, alarms and pointer events
Trace • Events are shown graphically in time plots and histograms that have advanced filter, identification and quantification functions and a zoom from 1 s to 1 h
Functions Auto configuration • Identification of the incoming signal parameters: network (SDH, SONET), bit rate, line code, optimal gain, frame structure, map-ping
FastScan • Search the incoming signal for all types of errors, alarms and events in the SDH/SONET structure
General Safety • Electrical safety: EN60950
Electromagnetic Compatibility • Radiated EMI: EN55022 • Electromagnetic Emission: - EN61000-3-2 - EN61000-3-3 • Immunity to EMI: - EN61000-4-2 (ESD) - EN61000-4-3 (RFI) - EN61000-4-4 - EN61000-4-5 - EN61000-4-6 - EN61000-4-11
Environmental conditions • Operates from 0 to 45 ½C • Storage: -25 to +70 ½C
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-21
218800-8.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
NG 2.5G Module
• Humidity: 5 to 90%, without condensation
NOTE: These specification are subject to modification without prior notice
A1-22
218800
218800-8.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Jitter/Wander Module
A1.5
A1
Jitter/Wander Module
Interfaces (through NG2.5G module) PDH • • • • •
E1 (2048 Kbit/s) E2 (8448 Kbit/s) E3 (34368 Kbit/s) E4 (139264 Kbit/s) Jitter/Wander specs as per ITU-T G.825 for PDH interfaces
T-Carrier • DS-3 (44736 Kbit/s) • Jitter/Wander as per ITU-T G824 for T-Carrier interfaces
SDH/SONET • STM-1 (155520 Kbit/s) - Optical: Jitter/Wander as per ITU-T G.825 - Electrical: Jitter/Wander as per ITU-T G.823 • STM-4 (622080 Kbit/s) - Optical: Jitter/Wander as per ITU-T G.825 • STM-16 (2488320 Kbit/s) - Optical: Jitter/Wander as per ITU-T G.825
Jitter Generator According to ITU O.171 and ITU O.172 • For checking the conformance to ITU-T G.823, G.824, G.825 and G.783 • Frequency offset: +/- 20.000 ppm • Jitter modulation: - Sinusoidal - Amplitude range: 5mUIpp to 1000 UIpp (O.172 0.2 to 800UIpp) - Amplitude step: 5mUIpp - Frequency range: 0.1Hz (extended range) to 20MHz (O.172) - Frequency step: 0.1Hz - Modulation amplitude versus frequency: according O.171 and O.172 minimum • Accuracy: according ITU O.171 and O.172 • Smooth amplitude changes transient.
Pointer Sequences Generation • • • • • • •
According to ITU -T G.783 Selection of sequence Programming of the initialisation and cool periods and other periods when applicable Status indication (period in which the sequence is operating) Automatic generation Manual generation of the phases of sequences AU/TU pointer sequence selection
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-23
218800-8.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
Jitter/Wander Module
Jitter Analyzer General • According to ITU O.171 and ITU O.172 • For checking the conformance to ITU-T G.823, G.824, G.825 and G.783 • Jitter demodulated output as per 9.6.1 in O.17214. - UIpp/Volt depending on scale - 75 Ohm output. • Demodulator status indicator: lock, unlock, no clock, wait, clip. • Maximum carrier frequency deviation: +/- 1000 ppm
Results • • • •
• •
•
• •
Instantaneous jitter peak to peak measurement. Instantaneous jitter RMS amplitude measurement Maximum measured jitter. User-resetable. Jitter hits - Measurement with programmable threshold - Count of number of hits (count and seconds with hits) Automatic Pass/Fail test indication in respect to maximum permitted jitter level at the interface. Automatic measurement band selection. Amplitude range: 0 to 1000 UIpp (O.172 0.1 to 800UIpp). User selectable scales: - 1 UIpp, 1mUIpp resolution - 10 UIpp, 10mUIpp resolution - 100 UIpp, 100mUIpp resolution - 1000 UIpp, 1UIpp resolution Modulation frequency range: - 10Hz to O.171 / O.172 maximum frequency - 1 Hz to O.171 / O.172 maximum frequency - 0.1Hz to O.171 / O.172 maximum frequency Integration period: 1, 10 and 60 seconds Measurement accuracy according O.171 and O.172
Measurement Filters • Measurement filters according ITU O.171 and ITU O.172. Single simultaneous measurement result. - OFF (Measurement filters disabled) - LP - B1 (LP + HP1) - B2 (LP + HP2) - RMS. High pass -3dB @ 12KHz, 20dB/dec. • LP filters: 40 kHz, 100 kHz, 400 kHz, 800 kHz, 1.3 MHz, 3.5 MHz, 5 MHz, 20MHz • HP filters: 2Hz (O.171), 10Hz, 20Hz, 100Hz, 200Hz, 500Hz, 700Hz (2 Mbit/s high Q ITU and ETSI), 1KHz, 5KHz, 250KHz, 1MHz • HP filters ETSI: 4Hz, 40Hz, 400Hz • Filters accuracy according to ITU-T O.171 and O.172
Jitter Automatic Measurements • Maximum number of frequencies: 22 • Measurements are displayed as a table and as a graphic plot • Selectable Tolerance and Transfer masks.
14. The outgoing signal is the jitter (or wander) modulation of the analysed signal. The outgoing signal is always present at the output interface, so it is not necessary to perform any previous setup by means of the GUI. The analog output makes it possible to perform measurements on the jitter modulating signal, by means of external instruments.
A1-24
218800
218800-8.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Jitter/Wander Module
A1
Jitter Tolerance • According ITU O.171 and ITU O.172 • Independent transmit and receive rates can be selected • Jitter Tolerance Masks for pass/fail test: - ITU-T Standard: G.823, G.824, G.825 - Telcordia GR253 - User-editable • Onset of Errors measurement criterion: - Programmable Error Source - Programmable Setting Time15 - Programmable Gate Time16 • Jitter Fast Tolerance17 • Programmable observation window • A Tolerance measurement file is automatically generated at the end of the measurement
Jitter Transfer • According ITU-T O.171 and ITU-T O.172 • Wide band measurement. • Independent transmit and receive rates can be selected • Programmable Setting Time18 • Frequency range: Up to 20MHz • Stimulus signal: - Default Stimulus19 - From a previous Tolerance measurement • Jitter Transfer Masks for Pass/Fail Test - ITU-T Standard: G.741, G.742, G.783 - Telcordia : GR.253 - User-editable • Programmable observation window • A Transfer measurement file is automatically generated at the end of the measurement
Wander Generator • According to ITU-T O.171 and ITU-T O.172 • For checking the conformance to ITU-T G.823, G.824, G.825 and G.783 • Wander modulation: - Sinusoidal - Amplitude range: 5mUIpp to 60000 UIpp - Amplitude step: 5mUIpp - Frequency range: 1 microHz to 10Hz - Frequency step: 1 microHz
15. Setting time: waiting period previous to the detection of errors once the jitter generator has changed the frequency and the amplitude of the generated jitter. Because of this waiting period, the signal at the output of the DUT does not have errors due to the previous frequency- amplitude stimulus, after the change of the jitter injected at the input. 16. Gate time: The procedure to measure the tolerance automatically is according to the Onset of Errors. The tolerance value for every frequency point is determined by the onset of two or more errored seconds during a (Gate) time of 30 s 17. Fast tolerance measurement: The tester generates pairs of values (amplitude, frequency) of a given mask. For every pair, more than 2 ES during 30 s produces a FAIL indication; otherwise the indication is PASS, according to the criteria of the Onset of Errors. 18. Setting time: waiting period previous to obtaining the output jitter amplitude, once the jitter generator has changed the frequency and amplitude of the generated jitter. Because of this waiting period, the signal at the output of the DUT does not have jitter due to the previous frequency- amplitude stimulus at the input. 19. According to ITU-T G.823, G.824, G.825 and ANSI T1.105.03
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-25
218800-8.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
Jitter/Wander Module
Wander Analyzer • According to ITU-T O.171 and ITU-T O.172 • For checking the conformance to ITU-T G.823, G.824, G.825 and G.783 • TIE - Samples low pass filtered, -3dB @ 10Hz, according O.172 - Amplitude range : +/-109 ns (O.172) - Accuracy as per O.172 - Sampling frequency: 50 samples/sec (O.172 30 samples/sec) - Displayed as a table and as a graphic plot - Transient TIE to be implemented in future applications • MTIE - Built-in (no external device required for MTIE calculation) - Real-time calculation and display - MTIE range: 1010 ns - User selectable amplitude scale - Resolution: 1ns - Observation window (S): 20ms to 106s (50 ms to 105 s -O.172) - Displayed as a table and as a graphic plot - MTIE masks: • MRTIE20 - Programmable frequency offset to be subtracted (in ppm) • TDEV - Built-in - Real-time calculation and display - TDEV range: 0.5 x 1010ns (10000 ns-O.172) - Resolution: 0.1ns - Observation window(S): 20ms to 3x105s (50 ms to 105 s -O.172) - Displayed as a table and as a graphic plot - TDEV masks Note: TIE, MTIE/MRTIE and TDEV measurements are simultaneously calculated and displayed. The amplitude scale applies to all measurements at the same time.
Complementary Measurements • Frequency offset (wander measurement mode) • Frequency drift (wander measurement mode) • Trace of the following values with 1 sec resolution in time axis: - Jitter amplitude vs time (resolution: mUIpp) - Maximum Jitter amplitude vs time (resolution: mUIpp) - Jitter amplitude RMS vs time (resolution mUI) - Jitter hits vs time - TIE (resolution: ns) - PMSt21 (Phase Measurement Status)
20. If reference clock is unavailable during wander measurement a frequency offset is superimposed to MTIE and must be subtracted. This is done by the MRTIE test. 21. Status of J/W analyser is displayed as an alarm. This is needed because in a trace of a jitter amplitude, TIE or hit it is necessary to know when a measurement is not performed due to lack of clock, lock or overflow. This alarm is not inhibiting except to hits trace. This indication is present in the trace but not in counter window.
A1-26
218800
218800-8.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Jitter/Wander Module
A1
General Safety • Electrical safety: EN60950
Electromagnetic Compatibility • Radiated EMI: EN55022 • Electromagnetic Emission: - EN61000-3-2 - EN61000-3-3 • Immunity to EMI: - EN61000-4-2 (ESD) - EN61000-4-3 (RFI) - EN61000-4-4 - EN61000-4-5 - EN61000-4-6 - EN61000-4-11
Dimensions • Height: 220 mm • Width: 270 mm • Thickness: 38.1 mm
Weight • 1.19kg approx.
Storage Temperature Range • -25 to +70 ºC (ETS 300 019-2-1)
Working temperature Range • 0 to +40 ºC normal conditions, up to +45 ºC exceptional conditions (ETS 300 019-2-7)
Transport temperature range •
-25 to +40 ºC (ETS 300 019-2-2) (using rigid case)
Relative Humidity • 5 to 90% (without condensation)
NOTE: These specification are subject to modification without prior notice
Issue 8 - 06/07
A1-27
218800-8.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A1
A1-28
Jitter/Wander Module
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A2
Tributary Numbering
A2.1
ITU-T G.707 Tributary Numbering for AU-4 STM-N Column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Issue 8 - 06/07
AUG #16
AUG #4
AUG #1
Time Slot
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
A2-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A2
Tributary Numbering ITU-T G.707 Tributary Numbering for AU-4
STM-N Column 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 ... 17279 17280 (64x270)
A2-2
AUG #16
AUG #4
AUG #1
Time Slot
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1
4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 1 1 1
3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3
4 4
4 4
3 4
63 64
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Tributary Numbering ITU-T G.707 Tributary Numbering for AU-4-4c
A2.2
A2
ITU-T G.707 Tributary Numbering for AU-4-4c STM-N Column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Issue 8 - 06/07
AUG #16
AUG #4
Time Slot
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
3
3
1
3
3
1
3
3
1
3
3
1
4
4
1
4
4
1
4
4
1
4
4
2
1
5
2
1
5
2
1
5
2
1
5
2
2
6
2
2
6
2
2
6
2
2
6
2
3
7
2
3
7
2
3
7
2
3
7
2
4
8
2
4
8
2
4
8
2
4
8
3
1
9
3
1
9
3
1
9
3
1
9
3
2
10
3
2
10
3
2
10
3
2
10
3
3
11
3
3
11
A2-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A2
Tributary Numbering ITU-T G.707 Tributary Numbering for AU-4-4c
STM-N Column 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 ... 17279 17280 (64x270)
A2-4
AUG #16
AUG #4
Time Slot
3
3
11
3
3
11
3
4
12
3
4
12
3
4
12
3
4
12
4
1
13
4
1
13
4
1
13
4
1
13
4
2
14
4
2
14
4
2
14
4
2
14
4
3
15
4
3
15
4
3
15
4
3
15
4
4
16
4
4
16
4
4
16
4
4
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
16
4
4
16
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Tributary Numbering ITU-T G.707 Tributary Numbering for AU-4-16c
A2.3
A2
ITU-T G.707 Tributary Numbering for AU-4-16c STM-N Column 1 ... 16 17 ... 32 33 ... 48 49 ... 64 65 ... 17279 17280 (64x270)
Issue 8 - 06/07
AUG #16
Time Slot
1
1
1 2
1 2
2 3
2 3
3 4
3 4
4 1
4 1
4
4
4
4
A2-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A2
A2-6
Tributary Numbering ITU-T G.707 Tributary Numbering for AU-4-16c
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
CE Statement of Conformity
A3
The company: Trend Communications, S.L. Pujades, 60, 4
declares, under its own responsibility, that the instrument: analyzer/generator for SDH, SONET, PDH,T-Carrier and Jitter/Wander manufactured by: Trend Communications in: Barcelona, Spain Brand name: Trend Communications model: Victoria Combo
complies with the following standards about electromagnetic compatibility: emissions: EN 55022, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3 immunity: EN 61000-4-2 (ESD), EN 61000-4-3 (RFI), EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6, EN 61000-4-11 electrical safety: EN 60950
in accordance with EMC 89/336/EEC Directive and 73/23/EEC Directive.
Ferran Sala Alcubilla Quality and Customer Service Manager
Issue 8 - 06/07
A3-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A3
A3-2
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A4
SNMP
A4.1
Introduction SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a set of protocols for managing complex networks. The first versions of SNMP were developed in the early 80s. SNMP works by sending messages, called Protocol Data Units (PDUs), to different parts of a network. SNMP-compliant devices, called agents, store data about themselves in Management Information Bases (MIBs) and return this data to the SNMP requesters. Each MIB is a database of objects22 that can be monitored. SNMP uses standardized MIB formats that allows any SNMP tool to monitor any device defined by a MIB.
A4.2
SNMP Query to Victoria Combo The Victoria Combo includes an SNMP agent that makes it possible for any remote station with an SNMP client, commonly known as a Network Management Station (MNS) to access the results and information collected during monitoring. All that the SNMP clients need to know about the Victoria Combo agent they are going to access is: •
its DNS or IP address
•
the associated communication port, which for SNMP is 161
•
the community identifier
•
the objects to which the Victoria Combo has access The SNMP objects are data variables that store the values queried or modified using SNMP GET or SET commands. The SNMP objects are identified and distinguished in a standard way, using names organised as a tree, in a similar way as in the DNS. An SNMP agent running on a given device responds to the objects (OIDs) available for that particular type of
22. An object is defined as any item that can be individually selected and manipulated. This can include shapes and pictures that appear on a display screen as well as less tangible software entities. In object-oriented programming, for example, an object is a self-contained entity that consists of both data and procedures to manipulate the data.
Issue 8 - 06/07
A4-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A4
Identification of the Tester
device. There are many types of object, from objects that identify the number of IP datagrams received by a particular network element to those that indicate the presence of a certain alarm in an SDH frame.
A4.3
Identification of the Tester All agents must implement a common MIB for the proper identification of its type, name, version, serial number, etc. In some modular systems, more than one tester may be available at the same time. This MIB must be placed under the trendtestGeneric tree since it must be totally or partially implemented by all the tester types. Each tester instance must be uniquely identified by the clients and must provide the following information:
A4-2
•
Number: the numeric index of the tester. This index is necessary when accessing any OID implemented by that tester and it will be used as the OID instance number.
•
Name: A unique string that identifies each tester
•
Type: this is a key that indicates the type of application that the instance implements (i.e. "stm16ag", "stm64ag", “nextgag” or “jitwanag”). Typically a GUI client will find a fixed type of tester to connect to and will ignore all the others. More than one instance of the same type may exist in the same system
•
Version: a string that describes the software version
•
Compatibility: this is a numeric description of the version. While the 'version' string is intended to be purely informative, the compatibility number is formatted in such a way that a client application can easily decide if it is compatible with a given tester instance. The compatibility number consists of a major and a minor version number. For example 1.9 has the 1 as a major number and the 9 as the minor one. This pair of numbers means that the SNMP client is compatible with an agent that has SW version 1.0.9 or greater excluding 2.0. Different major numbers between the client and the tester indicate that there is an incompatibility. Since minor versions are assumed to be backwards-compatible (provided the major version is the same), a client with a minor number lower or equal than the minor number of the tester is compatible. If the minor number is greater, then it would fail, because it is assumed that some functionality needed by the client is not implemented by the tester
•
Description: A string that describes the functionality of the tester
•
Release: a string that describes the release of the version
•
Serial: a serial number which identifies the physical module or tester
218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Identification of the Tester
A4
The above listed fields are implemented in a SNMP table object so that each field is mapped in a different row of the table and the instance number is the index to the row: trendTestGeneric (2) trendTestIdentTable (1) trendTestIdentEntry (1) trendTestInstanceNumber (INTEGER32) (1) trendTestInstanceName (STRING) (2) trendTestInstanceType (STRING) (3) trendTestVersion (STRING) (4) trendTestCompatibility (INTEGER32) (5) trendTestInstanceDesc (STRING) (6) trendTestRelease (STRING) (7) trendTestSerialNumber (STRING) (8) trendTestIdentStatus (ROWSTATUS) (9) trendTestInstanceCount (INTEGER32) (10) The column information can be strings, 32-bit integer numbers or row status indications as per SNMP-v2. If we consider hot-pluggable testers, then tester instances will be created and destroyed dynamically when modules are inserted and removed. For example, a Victoria Combo with two identical 10 Gb SDH modules will show, for the OID above, the following informations for two different instances (modules): Number
Name
Type
Version
Compat
Desc
Release
Serial
1
"stm64-1"
"stm64ag"
"2.7"
1.9
"STM-64 A/G"
beta3
"XA0020"
2
"stm64-2"
"stm64ag"
"2.7"
1.9
"STM-64 A/G"
beta3
"XA0021"
A client must get all the rows of the table and check which instances are running on a particular system. If the types and versions of the instances match the client requirements, then an instance number is picked and used for accessing any OID implemented by that instance.
Issue 8 - 06/07
A4-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A4 A4.4
Mapping Tester Data Base Registers to SNMP OIDs
Mapping Tester Data Base Registers to SNMP OIDs If we assume that more than one instance of the same tester can be running in the system, then all the manageable objects must be instanced and therefore must be seen from the SNMP manager as tables. From the example above, we may have several pieces of data available related to the B1 error, such as the absolute B1 error count, the B1 rate, the number of errored seconds, etc. Each of these fields can be mapped to a column in the B1 table:
trendTest (98) trendTestProducts (3) trendTestCombo (9) trendTestComboInterfaces (4) trendTestComboSdhMib (2) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs (2) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Analyzer (1) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Analyzer-Results (2) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Analyzer-Results-Rs (1) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Analyzer-Results-Rs-EB1 (12) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Analyzer-Results-Rs-EB1Entry (1) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Ana-RS-EB1 Index (1) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Ana-RS-EB1 RowStatus (2) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Ana-RS-EB1 Value (3) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Ana-RS-EB1 ActiveSecs (4) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Ana-RS-EB1 Rate (5) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Ana-RS-EB1 GatedCount (6) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Ana-RS-EB1 GatedRate (7) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Ana-RS-EB1 PartialCount (8) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Ana-RS-EB1 PartialRate (9) trendTestComboSdhMib-Objs-Ana-RS-EB1 Attribute(11)
For example, to read the BER rate on interface instance number 2, the OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.20700.98.3.9.4.2.2.1.2.1.12.1.5.2 must be used being the common part in this OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.20700 (20700 is the identifier of Trend Communications). It is obvious that the columns implemented by each OID depend on the type of data being represented by the OID. For example, a simple scalar would only need the first three columns. Column No. 1 (Index) and column No. 2 (RowStatus) are mandatory and defined by SNMP-v2, and only the third column (Value) would be required to contain the application data. A4-4
218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Obtaining the MIB
A4
The MIBs implemented by Trend Communications are based on OIDs containing 11 columns. Every column could be available or not, depending on the type of OID. If a column is not available, an SNMP request to this column will produce an SNMP error message. The following table illustrates which columns are available for the different OIDs related to the MIBs for Victoria Combo. The available columns are marked with (*).
Index
Row Status
Value
Active Secs
Rate
Gated Count
Gated Rate
Partial Count
Partial Rate
Selecti on Mask
Attrib ute
Column No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
SELECT -ION
*
*
*
*
*
S/U INTEGE R
*
*
*
COUNT ER
*
*
*
*
EVENT
*
*
*
*
ARRAY
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
Attribute is a mask of flags that give special information about the state of the data represented by the OID. There are two flags defined so far:
•
INVALID (bit 0)
•
INHIBIT (bit 1) The INVALID state is used to indicate that the data in the row is disabled and therefore it can not be modified. Typically a GUI would react to this state by greying out the component associated with the OID. The INHIBIT state means that the data in the row is enabled by its value is superseded by a higher-level event. For example, a Loss-of-Frame (LOF) alarm makes no sense when a higher-level alarm, such as Loss-of-Signal (LOS), is detected. In this case, LOS is said to inhibit LOF, and the LED in the GUI that shows the LOF alarm cannot be neither red nor green, but black or grey.
A4.5
Obtaining the MIB The MIB is available through the customer service of Trend Communications. See “International Contact Addresses” on page 1-ii for contact details.
Issue 8 - 06/07
A4-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
A4
Obtaining the MIB
A4.5.1
Release Note: The MIB includes all the functions and values needed for managing the Combo tester remotely via SNMP or for integrating the tester with Monitoring Platforms such as HP OpenView or MRTG:
A4-6
•
Generation/Analysis of line events
•
Generation/Analysis of SDH and SONET events (LED status & counters)
•
Generation/Analysis of PDH and TCAR events (LED status & counters)
•
Full event insertion modes
•
Time measurement fuctionality: autostart & duration, start/stop measurement.
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Index
10G module, See Modules 2.5G module, See Modules A
A bits 4-4 ABE 3-25, 4-25 AE 4-24 Alarms inserting 4-10 10G module 3-8 2.5G module 4-10 results 3-24, 4-23, 5-39, 5-45 Alphanumeric information 2-8 Analog output interface 6-15 ANSI T1.403 4-4, 5-6, 5-7 Anti-theft lock 1-6, 1-7 Application modules, See Modules APS 3-5, 3-29, 4-28 Attenuator 1-1 Audio IN/OUT 1-5 Audio settings 12-7 Auto measurement timer 3-12 Autoconfiguration 3-27, 4-27 Autodetection 5-46 Automatic Protection Switching See APS Available Time Block Errors See ABE B
Backlight settings Basic information
Issue 8 - 06/07
12-7 1-2
Battery charging compartment fitting removing Battery compartment BBE BE Bellcore TR-TSY-000008 BER BERT, See OH BERT BIS Bit Error Rate, See BER BNC Bringing-into-Service See BIS Buttons
1-6, 1-11 1-12, 1-13 1-11 1-12 1-11 1-4 4-25 4-24 4-4, 5-6, 5-7 3-3 4-16 1-5
2-3
C
C bits Cables Cards Compact Flash (CF) Ethernet Memory Microdrive wireless LAN CAS Catches, removing CF CF slot CF, See Cards Channel switching
4-4 1-1 9-3, 12-2 1-5, 9-6, 12-6 1-5 1-5 1-5 4-20 1-7 12-6 9-6 3-29
Index-1
218800-8.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Index Clock reference CMB Code number Combined jitter Compact Flash, See Cards Configuration files loading saving saving for the tester Connectors Copying, See Files CRC Current, See LEDs Customising Cyclic Redundancy Check See CRC
10-1 1-2 1-2 6-9 9-1 9-4 11-4 11-4 1-5 3-22 2-7
D
Date DB9 DC input DEC, See Pointer events Deleting files, See Files Desktop Device list DHCP server DM DNS servers Dynamic IP address
12-3 1-5 1-6
2-2, 2-3, 2-7 12-4 12-5 4-24 12-5 12-5
E
EFS English Error Free Seconds See EFS Errors Ethernet inserting 10G module 2.5G module results Ethernet CF cards NG 2.5G module options ports Events displaying inserting 10G module Index-2
3-25, 4-24 12-1
5-45 4-11 3-10 4-11 3-24, 4-23, 5-40 5-1, 5-45 12-6 5-14, 5-15 12-5 12-5 3-16 4-9, 11-3 3-8
2.5G module NG2.5G module tracing External memory, See Cards
4-9 5-28 7-1, 7-3
F
FEC 3-4, 3-7 File Manager 9-1 Files 9-1 configuration 9-1 copying 9-3 deleting 9-2 deselecting 9-4 external memory device 9-1 loading 9-4 location 9-3 moving 9-3 printing 9-4 properties 9-2 protecting 9-2, 9-3 report 3-23, 4-22, 5-38, 8-2, 9-1 results 3-23, 4-22, 5-38, 8-1, 9-1 screenshots 9-1 See also Configuration files transferring 9-5, 9-6 viewing 9-4 Firmware versions 12-1 Flash memory 9-3 Forward Error Correction See FEC Frames capture 3-19 French 12-1 Front module 1-2, 1-4 Functions 2.5G module 4-26 APS 3-29 APS (See APS) 4-28 autoconfiguration 3-27, 4-27 jitter tolerance 6-16 jitter/wander 6-15 jitter/wander transfer 6-18 MTIE/TDEV 6-20 OH BERT 3-30 performing 3-27, 4-26 RTD 3-29 scan 3-28 wander generation 6-13 G
General Framing Protocol See GFP 218800
218800-8.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Index General timing 10-1 German 12-1 GFP 5-1, 5-14, 5-25, 5-46 Gigabit Ethernet 5-1 Global action 11-3 Global LEDs 11-3 Global start & autostart 11-1 Graphical User Interface description 2-2 desktop 2-3 navigation 2-4 H
Higher-Order Path Overhead See HP-POH History, See LEDs Home screen Host configuration HP-POH
2-1 12-4 4-6
I
Icon bar Icons adding applications deleting description moving INC, See Pointer events Inserting alarms 10G module errors 10G module events, See Events pointer sequences 10G module In-Service Measurement See ISM Instant results displaying frequency LEDs optical power overhead bytes path trace messages pointer values Instant results, See Results INV See also Pointer events IP setup Issue 8 - 06/07
2-4 2-7 2-7 2-8 2-7 2-8 2-7
3-8
ISM ITU-T G.707 G.783 G.821 G.823 G.825 G.826 G.828 G.829 G.831 G.957 M.2100 M.2101 M.2110 M.2120 O.171 O.172
Jitter bandwidth combined definition intrinsic measurements output output jitter pointer jitter tolerance transfer Jitter/Wander module, See Modules
3-11
L
5-17
6-5 6-9 6-2 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-9 6-16 6-18
K
Keyboard editing files
3-25, 4-23, 5-41
3-6, 3-7, 5-21 3-11, 6-9 4-16, 4-24 6-4 6-4 3-12, 3-14, 3-15, 3-25 3-12, 3-14, 3-15, 3-25 3-12, 3-14, 3-15, 3-26 5-21 5-6 4-16, 4-24 3-12, 3-14, 3-16, 3-26 3-26, 4-25 3-27, 4-26 6-5, 6-16, 6-17 6-5
J
3-10
5-30 3-18 3-16, 4-17, 5-31 3-17, 4-18, 5-34 3-19, 4-18 3-22, 4-20 3-22, 4-21, 5-34
3-6, 4-7
1-4 9-2
LAN 1-4 Language 12-1 LCAS 5-9 LEDs 1-4, 1-12, 3-16, 4-17, 5-31 global 11-3 Loading a file 9-4 LOP 4-21 Loss of Pointer (LOP) 5-34 Loss of Sequence Synchronization See LSS Loss of Timing Input, See LTI Lower-Order Path Overhead (LP-POH) LP-POH 4-6
Index-3
218800-8.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Index LSS LTI
3-29 10-2
M
M bits 4-4 MAC address 12-5 Main menu 2-4, 2-6, 3-1 Mainframe 1-4, 3-3, 5-6 Management Information Base (MIB) A4-1 Mapping jitter, See Jitter Maximum Time Interval Error See MTIE Measurement macro 3-13 Measurements 4-14, 5-30 10G module 3-12 2.5G 4-14 G.821 objectives 4-16 G.826 objectives 3-15 G.828 objectives 3-15 G.829 settings 3-15 Jitter 6-4, 6-11 Jitter/Wander module 6-4, 6-11 M.2100 objectives 4-16 M.2101 objectives 3-16 macros 3-13 NG 2.5G 5-30 optical power 3-17 See also Functions signal frequency 3-18 timed 11-1, 11-2 timer 3-12 Memory cards, See Cards Menu structure 2-2 Microphone 1-4 Modules 1-2 10G 3-1 2.5G 4-1 adding and removing 1-2, 1-6 front module 1-4 inserting 11-3 Jitter/Wander 6-1, 6-2 multiple modules 11-1 NG 2.5G 5-1 Mouse 1-4 Moving files 9-3 MSOH 4-6 MTIE 6-20 Multiplexer Section Overhead See MSOH Multiplexing map 3-8
Index-4
N
N/A 4-24 Navigation 2-4 NDF 3-5, 3-25, 4-21, 4-23, 5-21, 5-34, 5-41 Network Element (NE) 6-4 Networking 12-4 dynamic IP address 12-5 host configuration 12-4 New Data Flag See NDF Next Generation 5-1 NG 2.5G module, See Modules NMFAS 4-4 O
Objectives setting OH BERT OH-BERT ON/OFF switch On-line help OOS Optical power Optical receiver Optical receiver, See Receiver Optical sub-modules Out-of-Service Measurement See OOS Overhead bytes
3-14, 4-15 3-30, 4-4 5-14 1-4 9-5 3-6, 4-7 3-17 5-22 1-9
3-19, 4-18
P
Path messages 4-6 Path Overhead, See POH Path trace messages 3-22, 4-20 PDH 4-23 setup 5-6, 5-23 Photodetector 1-4 PJE 3-25, 4-23, 5-41 Platform 12-1 device list 12-4 Ethernet 12-5 Ethernet CF cards 12-6 host configuration 12-4 serial port 12-6 PLL 6-7 PMP 4-7 POH 4-6 Pointer Event Adjustments See PJE Pointer Event Inversions 218800
218800-8.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Index See INV Pointer events 3-11, 3-25, 4-12, 4-23, 5-41 Pointer jitter, See Jitter Pointer sequences inserting 3-11, 4-12 setting up 3-11 Pointer values 3-22, 4-6, 4-21, 5-34 Power 1-1 PRBS 3-3 Protected Monitoring Point See PMP Protecting files 9-3 Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence See PRBS R
Rear module Receiver setup 10G module 2.5G module Recommendations, See ITU-T Reference clock input output Remote Control Remote control roles setting up Report files, See Files Report threshold viewer Reports Result See also Files Results files instant 2.5G Ethernet NG 2.5G module Jitter/Wander module NG2.5G module See also ITU-T timed 2.5G 2.5G module Ethernet G.826 G.828 NG 2.5G module Results files, See Files Issue 8 - 06/07
1-2, 1-6
3-6 4-7
1-5 1-5 13-1 13-1 13-4 13-1 3-27, 4-26 8-1
8-1 3-16, 6-10 4-17 5-35 5-30 6-4 5-38 3-23, 6-10 4-22 4-22 5-45 3-25 3-25 5-38
RFC 2544 RJ-45 Robbed bit Round Trip Delay See RTD RS-232 RS-232C RTD RTD State
5-47 1-5 4-20
9-4 1-5 3-29, 3-30 3-29
S
S bits 4-4 Safety 1-14 Scan 3-28 Scanning tributaries 3-28 Screen calibrating 1-10 Screenshot files 9-1 Screenshots - downloading 9-5 SDH 5-1 SEP 3-25 Serial port 12-6 SES 3-25 Setting up 2.5G module 4-3 NG 2.5G module 5-5, 5-22 Setup 2.5G module 4-2 Severely Errored Period See SEP Severely Errored Second See SES Shoulder strap 1-13 Signals DS1 4-20 E1 4-20 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP A4-1 Sleep mode 1-4, 1-10 SNMP A4-1, A4-4 Software - updating 12-2 Software versions 12-1 SONET 5-1 Spanish 12-1 Speaker 1-4 Standards, See ANSI, Bellcore, ITU-T Standby, See Sleep mode Start button 11-2 Stereo IN/OUT 1-5 Index-5
218800-8.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Index Summary, See LEDs Support Switch time Switching channels time Switching on and off
3-29 3-29 1-10
T
Tandem Connection Monitoring See TCM Taskbar 2-3 TCAR 4-23 T-Carrier setup 5-6, 5-23 TCM 3-3, 3-6, 4-4, 4-6, 4-23 TCP/IP 12-4 TCP/IP connection 9-5 TDEV 6-20 Time 12-3 Time Deviation, See TDEV Timed results 4-22, 5-38 alarm results 3-24, 4-23 error results 3-24, 4-23, 5-40 G.821 results 4-24 G.829 results 3-26 GFP alarms 5-43 GFP errors 5-43 M.2100 results 4-24 M.2101 results 3-26 M.2110 results 3-26, 4-25 M.2120 results 3-27, 4-26 pointer events 3-25, 4-23, 5-41 See also Results Touchscreen 1-4 Trace 7-1, 7-3 Trace viewer 7-1, 7-2 Tracing events 7-1 Traffic generation 5-18 Transferring files 9-6 Transmission and reception map 4-9 2.5G module 4-9 Transmitter and receiver maps 3-8 Transmitter setup 10G module 3-3 2.5G module 4-3 NG2.5G module 5-5 Tributary Numbering A2-1 AU-4 A2-1 AU-4-16c A2-5
Index-6
A2-3
AU-4-4c 14-1 4-28
U
UAS USB port
3-25, 4-15, 4-24 1-5
V
VCAT setup Victoria Combo testers Viewing Files
5-1, 5-8, 5-23 5-8 1-2 9-4
W
Wander definition generation measurements MTIE and TDEV-Based tolerance modulation MTIE/TDEV tolerance Window Wireless interface setup Wireless LAN 802.11 Working area, customising
6-2 6-13 6-22 6-15 6-20 6-16 2-6 12-6 12-5 2-7
218800
218800-8.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 2:00 PM
Trend Communications Ltd. Whitebrook Park Lower Cookham Rd. Maidenhead, Berkshire SL6 8XY - UK
TrendCommunications Americas: +1 256 461 0790 China: +86 10 8518 3141 Deutschland: +49 (0) 8932 3009-0 España: +34 93 300 3313 France: +33 01 69 35 54 70 India: +91 11 25554161 UK: +44 (0) 1628 503500
web: www.trendcomms.com mail:
[email protected]
A subsidiary of IDEAL INDUSTRIES, INC.